Forest Inventory and Analysis
Northeast Field Guide
Forest Inventory and Analysis Unit
Northeastern Research Station
Forest Service
U.S. Department of Agriculture
Version 1.4
May 2000
***************************************************************************
Anyone who establishes a permanent plot should recognize that he or
she hereby assumes responsibility for furnishing workers with a
complete picture of conditions on the plot at the time of its
establishment. Not only must each plot be properly marked and all
measures be in near perfect order, but all notes and records must be
complete. Otherwise, the plots may fail to yield the desired results and
those who in later years become responsible for their care and for the
analysis of the data, may be led to serious mistakes.
(U.S. Department of Agriculture, Forest Service 1935.)
***************************************************************************
Forest Inventory and Analysis
Northeast Field Guide
Forest Inventory and Analysis Unit
Northeastern Research Station
Forest Service
U.S. Department of Agriculture
Version 1.4
May 2000
Please direct questions or comments about this document to:
David J. Alerich
Forest Inventory and Analysis Unit
USDA Forest Service
11 Campus Blvd., Ste. 200
Newtown Square, PA 19335
phone: 610-557-4075
email: dalerich@fs.fed.us
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Table of Contents
Item #
Section / Item
Page
1.000
Introduction
1
2.000
2.110
2.120
2.130
2.140
2.150
2.160
2.170
2.181
2.182
2.210
2.220
2.230
2.240
2.310
2.320
2.330
2.340
Photo and Course to Plot Information
Starting Point
Course to Plot
Chaining to the Plot
Chaining Slope Distances
At Plot Center
Plot Center Witness
Plot Diagrams
Sketch Map of Plot Location
General Notes
Field Edit
Field Edit -- Month
Field Edit -- Day
Field Edit -- Year
Office Edit
Office Edit -- Month
Office Edit -- Day
Office Edit -- Year
7
7
9
9
10
14
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
3.000
3.100
3.110
3.120
3.130
3.140
3.145
3.155
3.160
3.170
3.180
3.190
3.200
3.210
3.220
3.230
3.240
3.250
3.255
3.260
3.270
3.280
3.290
Plot Level Data
State
Unit
County
Plot Number
Sample Kind
QA Status
Phase
Month
Day
Year
Previous Land Use
Previous Month
Previous Year
Cruiser
Tally
Trail or Roads
Horizontal Distance to Improved Road
Road Access
Public Use Restrictions
Recreation Use 1, 2 and 3
Water on Plot
Terrain Position
19
19
19
19
19
19
21
21
23
23
23
23
24
24
25
25
25
25
26
27
27
28
28
i
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Item #
Section / Item
Page
3.295
3.300
3.310
3.320
3.330
3.340
3.350
3.360
3.361
3.365
3.370
3.375
3.380
3.400
Site Productivity Class
GPS Coordinates
Degrees of Latitude
Minutes of Latitude
Seconds of Latitude
Degrees of Longitude
Minutes of Longitude
Seconds of Longitude
Number of Readings
Elevation
Location of GPS Reading
GPS Error
GPS Serial Number
Manual Version
30
30
33
33
34
34
34
34
34
34
35
35
35
35
4.000
4.100
4.105
4.106
4.107
4.110
4.120
4.125
4.130
Subplot Data
Subplot Number
Slope Correction
Subplot Center Condition Class
Microplot Center Condition
Subplot Slope
Subplot Aspect
Snow / Water Depth
Crown Closure
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
39
40
4.000
4.300
4.310
4.320
4.330
4.340
4.350
4.360
4.370
4.380
4.400
4.405
4.410
4.420
4.431
4.432
4.433
4.434
4.435
4.436
4.491
4.492
Condition Class Data
Condition Class Number
Condition Status
Land Use Class
Forest Type
Stand-Size Class
Regeneration Status
Reserve Status
Tree Density
Owner Group
Owner Class
Private Owner Industrial Status
Artificial Regeneration Species
Stand Age
Disturbance 1
Disturbance Year 1
Disturbance 2
Disturbance Year 2
Disturbance 3
Disturbance Year 3
Treatment 1
Treatment Year 1
40
42
43
54
61
70
72
72
73
74
74
75
76
76
77
79
79
79
79
79
79
80
ii
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Item #
Section / Item
Page
4.493
4.494
4.495
4.496
4.440
4.450
4.451
4.452
4.453
4.460
4.465
4.470
Treatment 2
Treatment Year 2
Treatment 3
Treatment Year 3
Physiographic Class
Timber Management Class
Past Nonforest / Inaccessible Land Use
Present Nonforest Land Use
Nonforest Year
Stand History
Stand Structure
Stocking Class
80
80
80
80
81
83
84
86
87
87
87
89
4.000
4.100
4.200
4.211
4.212
4.213
4.214
4.215
4.216
4.217
Boundary Reference Data
Subplot Number
Plot Type
Boundary Change
Contrasting Condition
Condition Class Number
Left Azimuth
Corner Azimuth
Corner Distance
Right Azimuth
89
92
92
92
93
93
93
93
94
94
5.000
5.100
5.110
5.120
5.140
5.200
5.300
Seedling Data
Subplot Number
Species
DBH
Reproduction Number
Condition Class Number
Number of Stems
Shrub, Dwarf Shrub and Vine Data for Maine
Inventory
95
95
95
95
95
95
96
97
6.000
6.100
6.105
6.100
6.120
6.130
6.140
6.150
6.155
6.160
6.170
6.175
Tree and Sapling Data
Subplot Number
Tree Record Number
Species
Horizontal Distance
Azimuth
Tree History
Diameter at Breast Height (DBH)
Diameter Check
Condition Class
Tree Condition Class
Lean Angle
99
100
100
101
101
102
102
106
111
111
112
112
iii
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Item #
Section / Item
6.180
6.190
6.200
6.205
6.206
6.207
6.210
6.220
6.230
6.240
6.250
6.260
6.264
6.270
6.271
6.272
6.273
6.274
6.275
6.276
6.290
6.300
6.305
6.310
6.320
6.330
6.340
6.350
Tree Grade
Saw log Length
Bole Length
Total Length
Actual Length
Length Method
Board-Foot cull
Percent Soundness (of Board-Foot Cull)
Cubic-Foot Cull
Percent Soundness (of Cubic-Foot Cull)
Crown Class
Compacted Crown Ratio
Uncompacted Crown Ratio
Cause of Death
Damage Location 1
Damage Type 1
Damage Severity
Damage Location 2
Damage Type 2
Damage Severity
Tree Class
Merchantability Class
Mortality Year
Decay Class
Utilization Class
Previous DBH
Previous Tree Class / Merchantability Class
Notes
113
114
115
115
116
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
125
126
128
133
146
146
146
147
149
149
149
151
151
151
151
7.000
7.001
7.005
7.100
7.105
7.110
7.120
7.130
7.140
Site Tree Information
Site Tree Number
Subplot Number
Condition Class Number
Condition Class List
Species
Diameter
Site Tree Length
Tree Age at Diameter
153
153
154
154
154
154
155
155
155
8.000
8.110
8.120
Ownership Information
Information Quality
Owner Contact
Pages 159 – 166 do no exist!
Nonforest / Denied Access / Hazardous Plots
157
158
158
9.000
Page
iv
167
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
#
Appendices
1
2
State and County FIPS Codes
Eastern U.S Site-Tree Selection Criteria and
FIA Forest Type Algorithm for the U.S.
Productivity Guide
U.S. Tree, Shrub and Vine Species Codes
Specific Tally Procedures
Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use
Classification
Glossary
Field Plot Quality Standards
Tree Grades
Slope Correction & Cull Tables and Scaling
Deductions
Tally Sheet Guide
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Page
v
187
199
211
215
225
235
251
261
269
277
283
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
vi
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
NORTHEAST CORE FIELD GUDE
Version 1.4
1.000 Introduction
This document describes standards, codes, methods, and definitions for
the Annual Forest Inventory field data collection procedures to be
carried out in the Northeast. Supplementary instructions will be issued
as needed.
The National Forest Inventory and Analysis Field Guide -- Federal
legislation mandates that annual inventories and periodic assessments
be made of the Nation’s forests. The units of the National Forest
Inventory and Analysis Program (FIA) are in the process of revising the
field instructions for data collection. The objective is to describe core
FIA field procedures that will be consistent and uniform across all FIA
units.
This core serves as the framework for regional FIA
programs; individual programs may add variables, but may not
change the core requirements. This document is a combination of
national core variables and regional variables of interest to the clients
and customers of the FIA unit at the Northeastern Research Station.
Unless otherwise noted, these items are considered CORE, that is, all
FIA Units and cooperators, as specified, will collect the information. It is
expected that a two-person field crew can measure all items in this
guide (Version 1.4) in less than a single day, on average, including time
spent traveling to and from the plot.
The FIA program is in transition, changing in response to legislation and
new customer demands. One of these demands is for increased
consistency, which this manual begins to address. Another change will
be integration of the FIA program with the plot component of the Forest
Health Monitoring (FHM) program. This will be accomplished by a joint
sampling approach where FHM plots become a subset of the larger
sample of FIA plots. In this model, plots formerly known as FIA plots will
now be called Phase 2 plots; plots formerly known as FHM plots will be
called Phase 3 plots.
1
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Field Guide Layout
Each section of the field guide corresponds to one of the following
sections:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Introduction and General Description
Plot Establishment
Plot Data
Subplot, Condition, and Boundary Data
Seedling Data
Tree Data
Site Tree Data
Ownership Data
Nonforest / Access Denied / Hazardous Plots
Each section begins with some general overview of the data elements
collected at that level, along with whatever technical background is
necessary to prepare the field crews for data collection. Descriptions of
data elements follow, in the following format:
DATA ELEMENT NAME -- <brief variable description>
When collected: <when data element is recorded>
Field width: <X digits>
MQO: <measurement quality objective>
Values: <legal values for coded variables>
Data elements and descriptions of when to collect, field width,
MQOs, and values, apply to both Phase 2 plots (formerly called
FIA plots) and Phase 3 plots (formerly called FHM plots) unless
specifically noted.
Field width designates the number of columns (or spaces)
needed to properly record the data element. MQO describes
the acceptable tolerance for each data element. MQOs consist
of two parts: a statement of the tolerance and a percentage of
time when the collected data are required to be within
tolerance.
Tolerances may be stated in +/- terms or a number of classes
for ordered categorical data elements (e.g., +/- 2 classes); in
absolute terms for some continuous variables (e.g., +/- 0.2
inches); or in terms of percent of the value of the data element
(e.g., +/- 10% of the value). For some data elements, no errors
are tolerated (e.g., PLOT NUMBER).
Percentage of time within tolerance is generally expressed as
"at least X percent of the time," meaning that crews are
expected to be within tolerance at least X percent of the time.
2
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Units of Measure
The primary measurement unit system is English. Data will be collected
in the field with English tools and instruments, and recorded in English.
Tree Limiting Dimensions:
breast height
stump height
merchantable top
minimum seedling height - softwoods
minimum seedling height - hardwoods
seedling/sapling DBH break
sapling/tree DBH break
softwood large/medium DBH break
hardwood large/medium DBH break
4.5 ft.
1.0 ft.
4.0 in.
6.0 in.
12.0 in.
1.0 in.
5.0 in.
9.0 in.
11.0 in.
Plot Dimensions:
Annular plot -- for sample intensification or sampling relatively rare
events.
Radius = 59.0 ft.
Area
= 10,935.88 sq. ft. or 0.25 ac.
Subplot - for selecting trees with diameter ≥ 5.0 in.
Radius = 24.0 ft.
Area
= 1,809.56 sq. ft. or 0.04 ac.
Microplot - for selecting seedlings and saplings
Radius = 6.8 ft.
Area
= 145.27 sq. ft. or 0.003 ac.
The distance between subplots is 120.0 ft.
The minimum area needed to qualify as forestland is 1.0 acre.
The minimum width to qualify as forestland is 120.0 ft.
3
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
General Description
The CORE field plot consists of four subplots approximately 1/24 ac.
with 24.0 ft. radius. The center subplot is subplot 1. Subplots 2, 3, and
4 are located 120.0 ft. at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees from
the center of subplot 1. Subplots are used to collect data on trees with a
diameter at breast height (DBH) of 5.0 in., or greater. Throughout this
manual, use of the word “plot” refers to the entire set of four subplots.
“Plot Center” is defined as the center of subplot 1.
Each subplot contains a microplot of approximately 1/300 ac. with radius
6.8 ft. The center of the microplot is offset 90 degrees and 12.0 ft. from
plot center. Microplots are numbered in the same way as subplots.
Microplots are used to select and collect data on saplings (DBH of 1.0
in. to 4.9 in.) and seedlings (DBH less than 1.0 in.).
As a CORE OPTION, the field plot may also include annular plots of
approximately 1/4 acre with radius 59.0 ft. The center of an annular plot
coincides with the center of the respective subplot. Annular plots are
numbered in the same way as subplots. Annular plots may be used to
select and collect additional data for regional enhancements, for
example to provide a better sample of rare population elements.
Data are collected on each field plot at the following levels:
Plot
Data that describe the entire cluster of four
subplots.
Subplot
Data that describe a single subplot of a
cluster.
Condition Class
A discrete combination of landscape
attributes that describe the environment on
all or part of the plot. Examples of such
attributes include condition status, forest
type, stand size, stand origin, owner group,
reserve status, and stand density.
Boundary
An
approximate
description
of
the
demarcation line between two condition
classes that occur on a single subplot,
microplot, or annular plot. There is no
boundary recorded when the demarcation
occurs beyond the fixed radius plots.
Seedling
Data describing trees with diameter < 1.0 in.
and at least 6.0 in. in length.
4
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Tree
Data describing saplings with diameter 1.0
in. to 4.9 in., and trees with diameter ≥ 5.0 in.
Site Tree
Data describing site trees.
Plot Integrity
Each FIA program is responsible for minimizing damage to current or
prospective sample trees and for specifying how these trees are
monumented for remeasurement. The following field procedures are
permitted:
•
Scribing and nailing tags on witness trees so that subplot
centers can be relocated.
•
Boring of trees for age on subplots and annular plots to
determine tree age, site index, stand age, or for other reasons.
•
Nailing and tagging of trees on microplots, subplots, and
annular plots so that these trees can be identified and
relocated efficiently and positively at times of remeasurement.
•
Nailing, scribing, or painting microplot, subplot, and annular
plot trees so that the point of diameter measurement can be
accurately relocated and remeasured.
All other potentially damaging procedures that may erode plot integrity
are prohibited. The following practices are specifically prohibited:
•
Boring and scribing of some specific tree species, such as
quaking aspen, that are known to be adversely affected (i.e.,
the initiation of infection or callusing).
•
Chopping vines from tally trees. When possible, vines should
be pried off trunks to enable accurate measure. If this is not
possible, alternative tools (calipers, Biltmore sticks) should be
used.
Twenty percent of all sample plots will be visited each year. Field crews
will be provided with the maps, photos, old tally sheets, and other
records necessary to locate the sample plots. Provisions have been
made for the selection of alternate plots, should they be needed.
The majority of the sample plots that will be established during this
inventory will be on land owned by private individuals and corporations.
The cooperation of these individuals and companies is vital to the
success of this inventory and subsequent inventories. In order to
maintain the level of trust that has been developed with these
5
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
cooperators, all employees involved in any phase of data collection are
directed to make a reasonable attempt to contact the property owner
and obtain their permission to establish or visit a plot.
Furthermore, permission must be obtained if the property is
posted against trespass. This includes additional posted ownerships
that must be crossed during the process of reaching the sample plot.
6
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
2.000 Photo and Course to Plot Information
Plot Photo -- The imagery used to establish sample plots can vary from
state to state. Generally, when aerial photography is being used, it will
most often be products from the National Aerial Photography Program
(NAPP). NAPP products are usually 10” by 10” contact prints with a
nominal scale of 1:40,000. They may be color infrared, or black and
white.
A field crew may have other image products to aid in locating and
establishing sample plots, such as composite satellite images or Digital
Orthophoto Quads (DOQ). If this is the case, it is probably best to
establish the course to plot using the procedures described in section
3.300.
When using photography, the procedure used to orient the photo is as
follows:
•
Align the photograph so that the edge with the identification
information is on top as you look at it. That edge is the northern
edge of the photo.
•
Select two features that can be identified on the photo; and on
the ground, or on a map. Individual trees, road intersections,
straight sections of road, buildings, field edges, or unique
locations along lakes and ponds, are good choices. Avoid
railroad beds and power lines because of their effect on
compasses.
•
Using a pen, lightly connect the two selected features with a
straight line (reference line). Be careful when writing on the
photos as the emulsion of the photo can be easily scratched.
•
Take a compass reading between the two selected features.
•
Record the azimuth, and place an arrow at the end of the
reference line, to show the direction of the azimuth.
•
Record reference line and all photo calculations on the Page 4
tally sheet in the “Calculations” section.
2.110 Starting Point ⎯ Starting points mark the beginning of the
traverse to a sample plot. They should be:
•
Easily identifiable on both the plot photo and the ground
•
Likely to remain unaltered prior to the next inventory
7
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
•
Minimum of 200 feet from the plot whenever possible
•
Pinprick and label it as SP on the back of the photo
Witness the starting point with two trees or other nearby features, and
record the pertinent information. If SP and/or the witness features are
trees, mark them with a bark scribe. Place two parallel diagonal scribe
marks, each about 4 inches long and 4 inches apart, at 5-1/2 feet above
ground, and near the ground, below an imaginary 1 foot high stump.
The lower scribes are referred to as stump scribes. Place the stump
scribes on the downhill side of the tree whenever possible. Scribe
marks on witness trees will face the SP. On SP trees, they will face the
direction of approach so that future crews may readily find them.
Make the scribe marks in the outer bark layer of the tree. It is important
that scribe marks be made carefully so that they do not expose or
penetrate the cambium of the tree.
Scribe marks that penetrate the cambium may provide a vector for
insects or disease. And, on thin-barked trees, can cause deformities
that may interfere with diameter measurements at subsequent
inventories. Use special care on thin-barked trees such as beech, and
on smaller sized trees of all species.
Illustrations of Scribing
Crew passed tree on
the left side.
Witness tree
Line tree
DO NOT CUT THROUGH THE CAMBIUM
8
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
2.120 Course to Plot -- Draw a thin line on the photograph connecting
the SP and the sample plot center (PC). The PC is the center of subplot
1. Measure the length of this line to the nearest 1/50 of an inch and
multiply that number by 66.7. This is the distance to be traversed.
Check your calculations carefully. Record the distance in the space
provided in Section 2.120 on page 3 of the tally sheet.
Extend the line from SP to PC so that it intersects with the reference
line. With a protractor, measure, to the nearest degree, the angle
between the two lines. Add or subtract this angle to the known azimuth
of the reference line to determine the azimuth from SP to PC. If the two
lines do not intersect, draw offset lines that will provide intersections.
Check your calculations carefully. Record the azimuth in the space
provided in Section 2.120 on page 3 of the tally sheet.
2.130 Chaining to the Plot -- Using a compass and a 100-foot tape,
begin the traverse to the plot. Two people, a head chainperson and a
rear chainperson, are needed for accurate measurements. The head
chainperson, by using a compass, must keep themselves and the tape
on the correct bearing line at all times.
In areas with dense
undergrowth, or an extreme amount of slope, it will often be necessary
for the rear chainperson to direct the traverse. Be careful to avoid
tangles, loops, or bends in the tape.
Once the rear chainperson reaches the new station, select a tree (or
other feature) for line reference. For trees record:
•
Appropriate species code
•
Diameter at breast height (DBH), estimated to the nearest even
two-inch diameter class
•
Estimated distance, in feet, from the station to the line tree
•
Direction from the station to the line tree, using the clock system,
with the direction of the traverse as 12 o'clock
Scribe line trees at about 5-1/2 feet high and facing the direction of
approach. Slant the bottom of the scribes to the left "//” or the right "\\”
to indicate which side of the line tree the crew passed. Stump scribes
are not necessary on line trees.
Make note of when the line of travel crosses streams, fences, or other
unique features. To avoid confusion with trees tallied on the sample
plot, do not mark any line tree within the last 150 to 200 feet of the
course.
9
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
In rough terrain, it may be necessary to "break chain", i.e., to use short
sections of the tape to aid in holding a level line. Record descriptive
notes in these cases. In mountainous country where horizontal distance
cannot be chained directly, measure slope distances and convert to
horizontal measurements as described in the next section.
Azimuth Calculations
azimuth 030
road
azimuth 120
(030 + 090)
090
080
045
azimuth 200
(120 + 080)
azimuth 345
(030 - 045)
reference lines
approach lines
starting point
plot center
2.140 Chaining Slope Distances -- The forward chainperson proceeds
up or down slope for the full length of the 100-foot tape. The rear
chainperson then uses the clinometer to determine the slope percentage
between his or her position and that of the forward chainperson.
Knowing the percentage of slope and the distance (usually 100 feet),
determine the slope correction from the prepared tables in Appendix 10.
The rear chainperson then makes the adjustment by adding the proper
distance to the nearest 1/10-foot to the 100-foot tape. Then the forward
chainperson stretches the tape taut again and sets the new distance.
Record the slope correction, in actual feet and tenths of feet, in the
Course to Plot information found on page 3 of the tally sheets. Slope
corrections are always added, never subtracted. The following example
illustrates how to record course to plot information on the Page 3 tally
sheet.
10
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
2.120 COURSE TO PLOT
DISTANCE
AZIMUTH
320 FEET
DIST
SC
200 DEG
SPP DBH DIS
DIR
NOTES
000 ---- SP
100 000 802 12
9
1
160 -------- STREAM --------200 024 403 8
300 016
320
2
10 1 OF 2
NO SCRIBE
---- PC
Establishing Subplots 2 -- 4 when Subplot 1 is Inaccessible -- At
times, subplot 1 can be inaccessible due to unsafe conditions such as
heavily traveled roads or deep bodies of water. The following example
illustrates how to locate subplots 2 - 4 when subplot 1 is inaccessible.
In the example below, the stream is noncensus water that is too deep to
access or cross. The crew establishing the plot does not know that the
subplot is inaccessible until they encounter the stream while chaining
from SP to PC.
State Rt. 100
*
State Rt. 3
SP
PC
State Rt. 7
Originally the course to plot was 534 feet at 150 degrees. The crew
chains 500 feet to the edge of the stream and they realize that they
cannot occupy subplot 1.
To establish subplot 2 without occupying subplot 1, the crew should
establish a turning point (TP1) at the 400 foot station of the course to
plot and proceed due north for 120 feet. Here a second turning point
(TP2) is established and the crew should proceed 134 feet at the
original course to plot azimuth of 150 degrees. This is the proper
location of subplot 2. Note that TP1 could be established at any subplot
11
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
along the original traverse as long as the distance from TP2 to subplot 2
is adjusted as well.
SP
TP2
*
subplot 2
TP1
subplot 1
After completing the tally at subplot 2, subplots 3 and 4 now need to be
established. Since the creek divides subplot 3 from the rest of the plot,
and the stream cannot be safely crossed, subplot 3 will have to be
accessed from the opposite side of the creek.
As for subplot 4, it can be accessed directly from subplot 2. The
distance and azimuth from subplot 2 to subplot 4 is 207.8 feet at 210
degrees. (See table in item 3.140 on page 20.)
subplot 2
207.8’ at 210°
subplot 1
subplot 3
subplot 4
12
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Finally to complete subplot 3, the crew will need to access this
subplot from the other side of the stream. A second SP and course to
plot is established using the aerial photography. Example below: SP #2
to PC is 400 feet at 220 degrees.
*
State Rt. 3
SP#1
State Rt. 100
*
SP #2
State Rt. 7
However, we cannot occupy P.C. and the goal in establishing a second
SP and course to plot is to establish subplot 3. This can be
accomplished by proceeding 120 degrees for 120 feet from SP #2 to a
turning point. This turning point represents the relative location of
subplot 3 to subplot 1. From the turning point, proceed on the
calculated course to plot of 400 feet for 220 degrees to locate subplot 3.
This procedure uses the same techniques as used to locate subplot 2
from the original course to plot.
SP #2
Chain 120’ at 120°
*
subplot 2
•
TP
subplot 1
subplot 4
Chain 400’ at 220°
subplot 3
13
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Several other methods can be used to get to the same point locations.
This is just one example to illustrate locating subplots without occupying
subplot 1. Crews should implement a method that is most efficient given
various conditions that exist on the photo and plot area.
Whenever subplots are established without occupying subplot 1, a
detailed description of the methods used must be written in the general
notes and course to plot sections of the tally sheet. Photos with more
than one SP and course to plot must be properly labeled. Also
whenever subplot 1 is not physically occupied, the crew should
monument one of the subplots (2-4) with witness trees and collect
GPS coordinates at this point. These coordinates are recorded in
the General Notes on the Page 4 tally sheet.
2.150 At Plot Center -- If the ground location does not agree with
the photo location, consider the following:
•
Was the starting point correctly identified and marked on the
photo?
•
Was the photo distance measured correctly?
•
Is the photo scale correct for the local area?
The scale of the photo can be determined by solving the following
formula for X. Remember to convert the photo distance and the ground
distance to the same units of measure.
1
X
=
photo distance
ground distance
If the actual scale of the photograph is 1:38,000, then the conversion
factor would be 63.33 feet per .02 inches. For each 100 feet of traverse,
this would be a 3.3 foot difference, less than calculated, from a nominal
scale of 1:40,000.
•
Are the reference line and course to plot azimuths correct?
An error of 1 degree would cause a 1.7-foot deviation, left or
right, per 100 feet of traverse. A 5 degree error would, over
a mile, end a course 20 feet behind and more than 460 feet
to the right or left of the true location.
•
Were slope corrections added along the course?
It is important to check to see where you are on the photograph, even
when you have found a plot that is being remeasured. Although the
previous instructions may have taken you right to plot center, the plot
may still be in a different spot than the one marked on the photograph.
14
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
If you determine that the plot is located in the wrong spot, do not move it
to the “correct location". Instead, pinprick and label the spot on the
photograph where the plot really is, and note the situation on the back of
the photo and the tally sheets.
In previous inventories, a procedure of locating plots “by inspection” may
have been practiced. In this procedure the crew that originally
established the plot did not set up a course to plot with a distance and
azimuth calculated from SP to PC. Most plots established in this matter
were located immediately off a road edge or in small wood lots where
locating PC directly from the photo seemed sufficient. This procedure
is no longer acceptable. Plots determined to have been established
by inspection will be rated as a failed plot.
Never locate plots “by inspection."
When a plot cannot be relocated, write a thorough description of where
you looked and your conclusions. Most likely, a different crew, or a
supervisor, will try to relocate the plot. This information will be very
helpful to them.
2.160 Plot Center Witness -- In the space provided, note the type of
item used to monument plot center. Also, select two witness trees that
are:
•
Close to the dowel and spaced approximately at right angles from
the dowel.
•
Easily recognized species that stand out from others in the area.
•
At least 3 inches DBH -- larger if possible.
•
Not expected to die, or be cut, in the next 10 years
For each witness tree, record:
•
The horizontal distance, to the nearest .1 (1/10) feet from the
dowel to the center of the base of the tree.
•
The azimuth, to the nearest degree, from the dowel to the center
of the base of the tree.
•
The appropriate species code.
•
The DBH, to the last whole .1 (1/10) inch.
•
Under notes, anything distinctive about the tree, example: “forks
at 4 feet", “clump of 3”, etc.
15
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Enter the tree number if the witness tree is also a tally tree. This is
determined during the tally procedure. If no witness trees are available,
use some other features and record descriptive notes.
Any subplot that does not have trees greater than 5 inches DBH
somewhere on the subplot should be referenced. Actually, subplot
witnesses should be used whenever there is a concern that the next
crew may have a problem locating a subplot. Make complete notes of
everything that you do so that it will be clear to the next crew.
2.170 Plot Diagrams -- Use this space to show the location of ecotypes,
and any unique features on or near the plot that may be helpful in
relocating the plot at the next inventory. It is important that ecotype
boundaries are sketched in accurately to avoid problems on the next
inventory when these boundaries will be remeasured.
2.181 Sketch Map of Plot Location -- A sketch map of the general
area surrounding the plot must be drawn for all plots with forested
condition classes. Crews should also include sketch maps when it is felt
that the conditions around the plot may change before the next
inventory. The sketch must contain enough information for someone to
find the starting point of the course to the plot, without the aid of the
aerial photograph. It must include:
•
References to the two nearest towns;
•
Names and/or numbers (if available) for all roads shown on the
sketch along with house or box numbers, when appropriate;
•
Intersections and other easily identified landmarks.
2.182 General Notes -- Use this area to note conditions about the plot
that others may find helpful when checking or processing the plot, or
even when re-establishing the plot during the next inventory. The value
of good notes cannot be underestimated.
2.210 Field Edit -- Before leaving the plot, complete a thorough edit to
make sure that all required fields have been completed and that all
entries are reasonable. Enter the three-digit code that identifies the
person that edited the plot for errors and completeness. Usually, this
will be the person that cruised the plot.
2.220 Field Edit -- Month
2.230 Field Edit -- Day
2.240 Field Edit -- Year
16
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
2.310 Office Edit -- To be completed by a crew leader or field
supervisor.
2.320 Office Edit -- Month
2.330 Office Edit -- Day
2.340 Office Edit -- Year
17
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
18
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.000 PLOT LEVEL DATA
Plot level data are recorded from the center of subplot 1. In general,
they apply to the entire plot. If subplot 1 is not established, record from
the lowest numbered subplot that is established.
3.100 STATE -- Record the unique FIPS (Federal Information
Processing Standard) code identifying the state where the plot center is
located.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: See Appendix 1
3.110 UNIT -- Record the unique code that identifies the inventory unit
where the plot center is located.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: See Appendix 1
3.120 COUNTY -- Record the unique FIPS (Federal Information
Processing Standard) code identifying the county where the plot center
is located.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: See Appendix 1
3.130 PLOT NUMBER -- Record the four-digit number that permanently
identifies each field plot. Plot numbers are unique within a county. Do
not ever change a plot number. Bring any suspected errors to the
attention of your supervisor.
3.140 SAMPLE KIND – Record the code that describes the kind of plot
being established.
Even though one plot design is established at all sample locations, there
are important differences between plots because some plots are being
established at sample locations that were used previously in the periodic
inventory.
19
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
A diagram of the current plot appears on page 22. It consists of four
fixed-radius subplots spaced 120 feet apart. Each subplot has a 24-foot
radius. When this plot is being established by itself for the first time it is
coded as a Sample Kind 1.
When a new plot is being established over an older plot that was used in
a periodic inventory the Sample Kind will be 6. In most cases these
older plots will be 1/5-acre fixed radius plots, or 1/5-acre fixed radius
plots with variable radius subplots. When 1/5-acre plots are remeasured
a new plot will be established over top of the older 1/5-acre plot. The
center of subplot 1 of the new plot will be in the same location as the
center of the 1/5-acre plot. Examine all trees, greater than 5.0 inches
DBH, that are within the circumference of the subplot 1 for a full set of
variables, depending on their size and condition.
A third sample kind is a replacement plot. A replacement plot is a new
plot that is established because the plot that was originally chosen could
not be relocated or because plot data was lost. Replacement plots are
coded as Sample Kind 3.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
Initial plot establishment
3
Replacement plot – replaces a previously established plot
because the plot could not be relocated, or the data was lost
6
Remeasurement of an NEFIA plot – remeasurement of a
previously established fixed radius plot that was new at the
previous occasion
7
Remeasurement of an NEFIA plot – remeasurement of a
previously established fixed radius plot that was remeasured
at the previous occasion
8
Remeasurement of an NEFIA plot – remeasurement of a
previously established variable radius plot that was
remeasured at the previous occasion
20
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.145 QA STATUS -- Record the code to indicate the type of plot data
collected, using the following codes:
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Standard production plot
QA field plot (cold check by QA crew)
Reference plot (off grid)
Training/practice plot (off grid)
Botched plot file (disregard during data processing)
QA check plot (complete remeasurement by a different crew)
3.155 PHASE -- Record the code that indicates the phase of the sample
plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
2
3
Phase 2 (FIA only) plot
Phase 3 (FIA and FHM) plot
21
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
FIA Field Plot Design
subplot 2
120 o
subplot 1
120 ft
subplot 3
subplot 4
Under normal conditions, chain to PC (center of subplot 1) first, and
then proceed to subplots 2 through 4 directly from Point 1. Sometimes,
however, it will be necessary to chain directly from subplot to subplot.
Chaining directly between subplots is not as accurate and should only
be done when absolutely necessary.
From Point
2
3
3
4
4
2
To Point
3
2
4
3
2
4
Azimuth
150
330
270
090
030
210
22
Distance
207.8’
207.8’
207.8’
207.8’
207.8’
207.8’
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.160 MONTH -- Record the two-digit code for the month that the plot
visit occurred.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
January
February
March
April
May
June
01
02
03
04
05
06
July
August
September
October
November
December
07
08
09
10
11
12
3.170 DAY -- Record the day of the month that the plot visit occurred.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 01 to 31
3.180 YEAR -- Record the year that the plot visit occurred.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: Beginning with 1998, constant for a given year
3.190 PREVIOUS LAND USE -- Transfer this information from the old
tally sheets. The codes used during the previous inventory are listed
below:
When collected: All plots that are being remeasured
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
Forest Land
20
40
41
50
51
52
timberland
unproductive forestland
unproductive reserved forestland
productive reserved forestland
Christmas tree plantation
urban forestland
23
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Nonforest Land
Without trees
with trees
61
63
65
67
69
70
71
72
73
62
64
66
68
--------74
75
77
79
81
83
85
76
78
80
82
84
86
cropland
improved pasture
idle farmland
other farm land
bog
marsh
salt marsh
swamp
maintained rights-of-way,
regardless of width
mining and wasteland
developed recreation area
industrial and commercial land
tract and/or multiple family housing
single-family custom housing
other (specify in general notes)
Water
91
92
census water
noncensus water
3.200 PREVIOUS MONTH -- Transfer this information from the old tally
sheet.
When collected: All plots that are being remeasured
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 01 to 12
3.210 PREVIOUS YEAR -- Transfer this information from the old tally
sheet.
When collected: All plots that are being remeasured
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1988, 1989, 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995
24
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.220 CRUISER -- Enter the three-digit numeric code of the person that
cruised the plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: As assigned
3.230 TALLY -- Enter the three-digit numeric code of the person that
tallied the plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: As assigned
3.240 TRAILS OR ROADS -- Record the nearest trail or road to the plot.
Use the plot photo, maps, or reasonable observations made while
traveling to the plot to determine nearest trail or road (within 1 mile
straight-line distance of the plot center). If two or more trails or roads
are estimated to be equally distant, code the higher quality trail or road
(lower code number). Base the coding decision on the condition of the
road at the time of the visit.
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land
condition class
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 90% of the time
Values:
0
1
2
3
4
5
None within 1 mile
Paved road or highway
Improved gravel road (has gravel, ditching, and/or
other improvements)
Improved dirt road (has ditching, culverts, signs,
reflectors, or other improvements)
Unimproved dirt road/four-wheel drive road (has no
signs of any improvements)
Human access trail- clearly noticeable and primarily
for recreational use
3.250 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE TO IMPROVED ROAD -- Record the
straight-line distance from plot center (subplot 1) to the nearest
improved road. An improved road (TRAILS OR ROADS = 1, 2, or 3) is
a road of any width that is maintained as evidenced by pavement,
gravel, grading, ditching, and/or other improvements.
25
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land
condition class
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 90% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
100 ft or less
101 to 300 ft
301 to 500 ft
501 to 1000 ft
1001 ft to 1/2 mile
Greater than 1/2 to 1 mile
Greater than 1 to 3 miles
Greater than 3 to 5 miles
Greater than 5 miles
3.255 ROAD ACCESS -- Record the first road access restrictions
encountered while traveling to the plot. These restrictions limit car and
truck access to the starting point for the walk to the plot, and may occur
on ownerships encountered before reaching the plot area.
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land
condition class
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 90% of the time
Values:
0
1
2
3
4
9
None – no road access restrictions
Road blocked by locked gate or cable across road
Road blocked by a human-made obstruction across
road (ditch, mound, etc.)
Road blocked by natural occurrences (trees blown
over onto road, road or bridge washed out)
Posted no motorized vehicle signs; road present,
but restricted area such as Wilderness or National
Park where vehicles are not allowed
Other – specify in plot-level notes
26
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.360 PUBLIC USE RESTRICTIONS -- Record, if any, the restriction
posted near or on the plot area that limits public use of the plot area; if
more than one restriction occurs for the plot area, record the lowest
number restriction present (1-3, 9).
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land
condition class
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 90% of the time
Values:
0
1
2
3
9
None – no public use restrictions
Keep out / no trespassing
No hunting or fishing
No dumping
Other - specify in plot-level notes
3.270 RECREATION USE 1, 2, and 3 (3 opportunities) -- Record up to
3 signs of recreation use encountered within the accessible forest land
portion of any of the four subplots, based on evidence such as campfire
rings, compacted areas (from tents), hiking trails, bullet or shotgun
casings, tree stands, etc. Record the recreation use that has had the
most significant impact on the plot area first, then the second and third
use. For example, in general numerous four-wheel drive or ATV trails
would be coded before camping, and camping before hiking, and hiking
before fishing. Use the coding system provided as a hierarchy. Do not
repeat codes, except codes 0 and 9. Physical recreation evidence must
be present to code 1-9. Also, disregard dumping where no evidence of
recreation is present. Examine the plot area for clues before spending
an exorbitant amount of time trying to find evidence that normally would
not be found in the area; look for the obvious signs first.
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land
condition class
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, at least 90% of the time
Values:
No evidence of recreation use
0
Motor vehicle (four wheel drive, ATV, motorcycle, snowmobile)
1
Horse riding, dog team trails, ski trails
2
Camping
3
Hiking
4
Hunting/shooting
5
Fishing
6
Boating – physical evidence such as launch sites or docks
7
Other – recreation use where evidence is present, such as human
9
litter, but purpose is not clear or does not fit into above categories.
27
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.280 WATER ON PLOT -- Record the water source that has the
greatest impact on the area within the accessible forest land portion of
any of the four subplots. The coding hierarchy is listed in order from
large permanent water to temporary water. This variable may be used
for recreation, wildlife, hydrology, and timber availability studies.
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land
condition class
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 90% of the time
Values:
0
1
2
3
4
5
9
None – no water sources
Permanent streams or ponds too small to qualify as
noncensus water
Permanent water (too small to qualify as Census or
noncensus water) in the form of deep swamps, bogs,
marshes without standing trees present or with standing
trees and less than 1.0 ac in size
Ditch/canal – human-made channels used as a means of
moving water, such as irrigation or drainage which are too
small to qualify as noncensus water
Temporary streams
Flood zones – evidence of flooding when bodies of water
exceed their natural banks
Other temporary water – specify in plot notes
3.290 TERRAIN POSITION -- Terrain position is the location of the plot,
or portion of a plot, along the slope profile. Assess terrain position on
the plot. The plot is defined as the area contained within the triangle
formed by the outer boundaries of subplots 2, 3, and 4. This area is
approximately .65 ac. Select the terrain position that best relates the
sample point to the slope profile. To avoid micro-site conditions, a
distance of 100 feet is the minimum span to consider.
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land
condition class
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 90% of the time
Values: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8
NOTE: Codes 4 (bench), 6 (bottom land) and 7 (flatland) are the only
valid codes for plots with an aspect of 000 (slope less than 5%).
Bottomlands are associated with a drainage, while flatlands are not.
28
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Terrain Position
1 top of slope -- convex region
2 upper slope -- convex region at upper edge of slope
3 midslope -- uniform, fairly straight region
4 bench -- area of level land with slopes above and below
5 lower slope -- concave region at the lower edge of slope
6 bottomland -- horizontal region in low-lying areas, which may
be subject to occasional flooding
7 flatland -- regions not part of or related to slopes; may
have minimal elevation changes, i.e. less than 5 %
1
2
3
4
6 and 7
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5
Description
top of slope -- convex region
upper slope – convex region at upper edge of slope
midslope – uniform, fairly straight region
bench – area of level land with slopes above and below
lower slope – concave region at the lower end of slope
bottomland – horizontal region in low-lying areas. These
areas may be subject to occasional flooding.
flatland – regions that are not part of, or related to,
slopes.
These areas may have minimal elevation
changes of less than 5 %.
nonforest – use this code when the entire plot is
nonforest
29
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.295 SITE PRODUCTIVITY CLASS -- On plots that are being
remeasured, this field indicates the potential productivity class of the site
where the plot is located. Based upon site index readings from previous
inventories, a site productivity class would have been developed.
Possible codes are 0, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7. Code 0 indicates that cores
were either unavailable or unable to be read during the last inventory.
Code 7 indicates that the site productivity class was unproductive.
Codes 3 through 6 indicate incremental levels of productive forestland.
When completing plots on the data recorder, this information will appear
as a part of the plot history. When completing plots on paper, it will be
necessary to transfer this information from the CORE list for the county.
The CORE list will indicate which remeasure plots require site index
information. (Note: Do not use the Site code on the provided plot print
out as a basis to collect this information. Always refer to the CORE list.)
If a plot has been coded 0 or 7, then site index cores must be collected
for each condition class on the plot. Site index cores are also required
for any forested condition class with a number higher than 1, and for all
forested condition classes on new plots.
When collected: All plots with at least one accessible forest land
condition class
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 0,3,4,5,6,7
3.300 GPS COORDINATES
Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates will be recorded for all
field plots, regardless of land use. The Portable Lightweight Global
Positioning Receiver (PLGR), manufactured by Rockwell, Inc. will be
used in all instances.
GPS UNIT SETTINGS, DATUM, and COORDINATE SYSTEM
Consult the GPS unit operating manual or other regional instructions to
ensure that the GPS unit internal settings, including Datum and
Coordinate system, are correctly configured.
Each FIA unit will determine the Datum to be used in that region. Most
will use the NAD 27 Datum (also known as NAS-C or NA 27
CONUS/CLK66), but coordinates collected using any appropriate datum
can be converted back to a national standard for reporting purposes.
Each FIA unit will also determine which coordinate system to use.
Regions using a Geographic system will collect coordinates in Degrees,
Minutes, and Seconds of Latitude and Longitude; those using the UTM
coordinate system will collect UTM Easting, Northing, and Zone.
30
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
PLGR PROCEDURES
Each morning while traveling to the plot in the vehicle, connect the
PLGR to the cigarette lighter adapter and external antenna and run it for
15 minutes or until the horizontal error is less than ± 70 ft appears on
the POS screen. This step is only necessary before the first plot of the
day. Once this step has been completed the PLGR may be turned off
until it is needed at the plot.
It is important that this effort to “warm-up” the PLGR be taken every
morning. It is equally important that the PLGRs are kept charged and
that a full set of backup batteries is kept with each unit. Recent changes
in the way sample plots will be established will cause crews to rely on
their GPS receivers more than they have in the past. A functioning fully
charged GPS receiver will often be the key to having a successful day in
the field.
Establishing a course to plot for new plots: At SP, start the PLGR
and wait (3 to 5 minutes) until the horizontal error is less than ± 70 ft
appears on the POS screen. Switch the PLGR to “average” mode and
log 180 position fixes. Write the 180th position displayed on the PLGR
in the SP GPS section of the Page 3 tally sheet.
Press the “WP” key and ENTER this SP coordinate as a new waypoint.
Press “WP” key again and ENTER the “plot coordinates” from the label
on the Page 3 tally sheet. Press “WP” again and toggle to “DIST”.
Press the down arrow key and change the first WP number to SP and
the second WP number to PC. The PLGR will calculate the range and
azimuth to traverse on the ground to reach PC. Record this information
in item 2.120 Course to Plot on the Page 3 tally sheet and proceed with
the traverse to PC.
Geo-referencing plot center for all plots where PC is occupied:
After completing the traverse to PC from either the PLGR calculations or
by using the previous course to plot information, stand at PC and hold
the Rockwell PLGR antenna plumb over the dowel. Wait (3 to 5
minutes) until the PLGR indicates the horizontal error is less than ± 70 ft
on the POS screen.
When the horizontal error is less than ± 70 ft is achieved, indicating the
highest possible accuracy, press and hold the POS key until AVG
appears. Allow the counter to average 180 fixes. As the counter nears
180, be prepared to tell the tally person the coordinate, who then
records them on page 3 of the tally sheet. Press and hold the POS key
to stop averaging. Press the OFF key twice.
For new nonforest plots where PC is not occupied:
After
establishing and recording a course to plot using the PLGR, enter “plot
31
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
coordinates” from the label on the Page 3 tally sheet for items 3.310 –
3.360. (Note: Enter this coordinate only if traverse is not completed
and PC is not occupied. If PC is occupied, follow the procedure
previously described in “geo-referencing plot center.”)
For remeasure nonforest plots where the previous SP is still
present: Stand at the old starting point (SP) and collect coordinates as
previously described. Write the 180th position displayed on the PLGR in
the SP GPS section of the Page 3 tally sheet.
Press the “WP” key and enter this coordinate as a new waypoint. Press
“WP” key again and toggle to “RNG-CALC”. Activate the menu and
change the default waypoint number to the waypoint you previously
entered. Enter the previously calculated values for distance and
azimuth to PC (i.e., previous course to plot) into the PLGR in the “RNG”
and “AZ” fields by pressing the “NUM LOCK” key. Press the down
arrow key to see the calculated position of PC. Enter this coordinate in
the PC GPS section of the Page 3 tally sheet in items 3.310 through
3.360. (Note: Enter this coordinate only if traverse is not completed
and PC is not occupied. If PC is occupied, follow the procedure
previously described in “geo-referencing plot center.”)
For remeasure nonforest plots where the previous SP is not
present: Using the old photography follow the instructions in sections
2.000 – 2.120 to establish a new course to plot. Stand at the new SP
and collect coordinates as previously described. Write the 180th
position displayed on the PLGR in the SP GPS section of the Page 3
tally sheet.
Press the “WP” key and enter this coordinate as a new waypoint. Press
“WP” key again and toggle to “RNG-CALC”. Activate the menu and
change the default waypoint number to the waypoint you previously
entered. Enter the previously calculated values for distance and
azimuth to PC into the PLGR in the “RNG” and “AZ” fields by pressing
the “NUM LOCK” key. Press the down arrow key to see the calculated
position of PC. Enter this coordinate in the PC GPS section of the Page
3 tally sheet in items 3.310 through 3.360. (Note: Enter this coordinate
only if traverse is not completed and PC is not occupied. If PC is
occupied, follow the procedure previously described in “geo-referencing
plot center.”)
32
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
COLLECTING READINGS
Collect at least 180 GPS readings at the plot center, which will then be
averaged by the GPS unit. Each individual reading should have an error
of less than 70 ft if possible (the error of all the averaged readings is far
less).
Soon after arriving at plot center, use the GPS unit to attempt to collect
coordinates. If suitable readings (180 readings at error < 70 ft) cannot
be obtained, try again before leaving the plot center.
If it is still not possible to get suitable coordinates from plot center,
attempt to obtain them from a location within 200 ft of plot center.
Obtain the azimuth and horizontal distance from the "offset" location to
plot center. (Record this “offset information” in the General Notes or
Calculation box on the Page 4 tally sheet.) If a PLGR unit is used, use
the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to compute the coordinates of the
plot center.
Coordinates may be collected further than 200 ft away from the plot
center if a laser measuring device is used to determine the horizontal
distance from the "offset" location to plot center. Again, if a PLGR unit
is used, use the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to compute the
coordinates of the plot center.
In all cases try to obtain at least 180 readings before recording the
coordinates.
3.310 DEGREES OF LATITUDE -- Enter the degrees of latitude as
shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (DD)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.320 MINUTES OF LATITUDE -- Enter the minutes of latitude as
shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (MM)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
33
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.330 SECONDS OF LATITUDE -- Enter the seconds and hundredths
of seconds of latitude as shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 4 digits (SSSS)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.340 DEGREES OF LONGITUDE -- Enter for the degrees of longitude
as shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (DD)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.350 MINUTES OF LONGITUDE -- Enter the minutes of longitude as
shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (MM)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.360 SECONDS OF LONGITUDE -- Enter the seconds and
hundredths of seconds of longitude as shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 4 digits (SSSS)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.361 NUMBER OF READINGS -- Record a 3-digit code indicating how
many readings were averaged by the GPS unit to calculate the plot
coordinates. Collect at least 180 readings if possible.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 999
3.365 ELEVATION -- Record the elevation above mean sea level of the
plot center, in feet, as determined by GPS.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 5 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: -00100 to 20000
34
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.370 LOCATION OF GPS READING -- Enter a one-digit code to
indicate where the GPS reading for the plot was taken.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
reading was taken over plot center
reading was taken from a location other than over plot
center
3.375 GPS ERROR -- Record the error as shown on the GPS unit to the
nearest foot. Make every effort to collect readings only when the error is
less than 70 ft. However, if after trying several different times during the
day, at several different locations, this is not possible, record the best
reading that can be obtained with an error of up to 999 ft.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 0 to 70 if possible, 71 to 999 if an error of less than 70 cannot
be obtained
3.380 GPS SERIAL NUMBER -- Record the last six digits of the serial
number on the GPS unit used.
When collected: When GPS UNIT > 0
Field width: 6 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 000001 to 999999
3.400 MANUAL VERSION -- Record the version number of the National
Core Field Guide that was used to collect the data on this plot. This will
be used to match collected data to the proper version of the field
manual.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (x.y)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1.1 (Maine 1999) and higher
35
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
36
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.000 SUBPLOT, CONDITION CLASS & BOUNDARY INFORMATION
SUBPLOT INFORMATION
Each subplot is described by a series of area parameters relating to
topographic features and existing cover type. These data also relate to
the microplot, since the microplot is contained within the subplot
perimeter. If the subplot center cannot be accessed, do not collect and
record data on the subplot.
4.100 SUBPLOT NUMBER – Record the code corresponding to the
number of the subplot.
When collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
Center subplot
North subplot
Southeast subplot
Southwest subplot
4.105 SLOPE CORRECTION -- Record the amount of slope correction
that was applied, to the nearest tenth of a foot, while traversing from
subplot 1 to subplots 2, 3, and 4.
When collected: At subplots 2, 3 and 4
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 001 to 999
4.106 SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION -- Record the CONDITION
CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the subplot center.
When collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
4.107 MICROPLOT CENTER CONDITION -- Record the CONDITION
CLASS NUMBER of the condition class at the microplot center.
When collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
37
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.110 SUBPLOT SLOPE -- Record the angle of slope across the
subplot to the nearest 1 percent. SUBPLOT SLOPE is determined by
sighting the clinometer along a line parallel to the average incline (or
decline) of each subplot. This angle is measured along the shortest
pathway down slope before the drainage direction changes. To
measure SUBPLOT SLOPE, Observer 1 should stand at the uphill edge
of the subplot and sight Observer 2, who stands at the downhill edge of
the subplot. Sight Observer 2 at the same height as the eye-level of
Observer 1. Read the slope directly from the percent scale of the
clinometer.
If slope changes gradually across the subplot, record an average slope.
If slope changes across the subplot but the slope is predominately of
one direction, code the predominate slope percentage rather than the
average. If the subplot falls directly on or straddles a canyon bottom or
narrow ridge top, code the slope as follows:
•
If the subplot falls directly between two side hills, code the
average slope of the side hill(s).
•
If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top,
but most of the area lies on one side hill, code the slope of the
side hill.
When collected: All subplots with accessible forest land
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10%, at least 90% of the time
Values: 000 to 155
4.120 SUBPLOT ASPECT -- Record the aspect across the subplot, to
the nearest 1 degree. SUBPLOT ASPECT is determined along the
direction of slope for land surfaces with at least 5 percent slope in a
generally uniform direction. SUBPLOT ASPECT is measured with a
hand compass along the same direction used to determine slope. If
aspect changes gradually across the subplot, record an average aspect.
If aspect changes across the subplot but the aspect is predominately of
one direction, code the predominate direction rather than the average.
If the subplot falls on or straddles a canyon bottom or narrow ridge top,
code aspect as follows:
•
•
Code the aspect of the ridge line or canyon bottom.
If the subplot falls on a canyon bottom or on a narrow ridge top,
but most of the area lies on one side hill, code the aspect of the
side hill.
38
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
When collected: All subplots with an accessible forest
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10 degrees, at least 90% of the time
Values:
000
001
002
.
.
360
no aspect, slope < 5 percent
1 degree
2 degrees
.
.
360 degrees, due north
4.125 SNOW/WATER DEPTH -- Record to the nearest 0.1 ft the
average approximate depth of water or snow covering the subplot at the
time of data collection. This variable is used to indicate subplots where
some variables (e.g., seedling count, total heights) may be measured
with less certainty due to conditions at the time of measurement.
When collected: All subplots with an accessible forest land condition
class (CONDITION STATUS = 1)
Field width: 2 digits (x.y)
MQO: +/- 0.5 ft at the time of measurement (no MQO after initial date of
visit)
Values: 0.0 to 9.9
4.130 CROWN CLOSURE -- Estimate the percent of the subplot area
that is covered by live tree crowns directly overhead and record the
appropriate code. If foliage is not present due to seasonal variation or
temporary defoliation, visualize the amount of live crown that would
normally be present.
When collected: All subplots with accessible forestland – MAINE only
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: +/- 1 class, at least 90% of the time
Values:
0
1
2
3
0 to 25 percent
26 to 50 percent
51 to 75 percent
Greater than 75 percent
39
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
CONDITION CLASS
The Forest Inventory and Analysis (FIA) plot is cluster of four subplots in
a fixed pattern. Subplots are never reconfigured or moved in order to
confine them to a single condition, or condition class; a plot may
straddle more than one condition class. Every plot samples at least one
condition class: the condition class present at plot center (the center of
subplot 1). Delineation and mapping of condition classes is a major
departure from past inventory practices, and is intended to allow flexible
post stratification of data for a variety of purposes.
DETERMINATION OF CONDITION CLASS
Step 1: Delineate the plot area by CONDITION STATUS
The first attribute considered when defining a condition class is
CONDITION STATUS. The area sampled by a plot is assigned into
condition classes based upon the following differences in CONDITION
STATUS:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Accessible forestland
Nonforest land
Noncensus water
Census water
Denied access area
Area too hazardous to visit
Area that is not in the sample, e.g., in Canada or Mexico.
Land Use Class (Northeast Regional Variable)
Accessible forestland defines the population of interest for FIA
purposes. This is the area where most of the data collection is
conducted.
Step 2: Further subdivide Accessible Forest Land by seven mapping
variables
Any condition class sampled as accessible forestland may be further
subdivided, in order of listed priority, into smaller condition classes if
distinct, contrasting condition classes are present because of variation
within the sampled area in any of the following attributes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Land Use Class (Northeast Regional Variable)
Forest Type
Stand Size Class
Regeneration Status
Reserved Status
Tree Density
Owner Group
40
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
At time of re-inventory, two additional attributes, PAST
NONFOREST/INACCESSIBLE
LAND
USE
and
PRESENT
NONFOREST LAND USE are mapped to delineate new condition
classes if the sampled area on a plot has changed to or from accessible
forest land. This allows tracking of land use changes without requiring
mapping of all nonforest condition classes on all plots.
No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting
accessible forestland condition classes. For each condition class
recognized, several “ancillary attributes” that help describe the condition
will be collected, but will not be used for mapping purposes (see
Sections 4.400 to 4.470).
CONDITION CLASS ATTRIBUTES
A CONDITION CLASS NUMBER and a classification for CONDITION
STATUS are required for every condition class sampled on a plot. For
each condition class classified as accessible forestland, a classification
is required for each of the following attributes:
Attributes where a change causes a separate condition class
4.320
4.330
4.340
4.350
4.360
4.370
4.380
Land Use Class (Northeast Regional Variable)
Forest Type
Stand Size
Regeneration Status
Reserved Status
Tree Density
Owner Group
Ancillary – changes do not delineate a new condition class
4.400
4.405
4.410
4.420
4.431
4.432
4.491
4.492
4.440
4.450
4.460
4.465
4.470
Owner Class
Private Owner Industrial Status
Artificial Regeneration Species
Stand age
Disturbance (up to 3 coded)
Disturbance Year (1 per disturbance)
Treatment (up to 3 coded)
Treatment Year (1 per treatment)
Physiographic Class
Timber Management Class (Northeast Regional Variable)
Stand History (Northeast Regional Variable)
Stand Structure (Northeast Regional Variable)
Stocking Class (Northeast Regional Variable)
41
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Three additional attributes require classification in specific situations:
4.451
Past Nonforest/ Inaccessible Land Use (for area afforested
since last inventory).
4.452
Present Nonforest Land Use (for area converted from
accessible forest land condition class to nonforest land
since last inventory).
4.453
Nonforest Year (estimate year that accessible forest land
condition class was converted to nonforest).
When classifying condition status, owner group, reserved status, and
previous and present nonforest use, base the classification on what is
present within the area defined by the fixed radius plot (annular, subplot,
or microplot). When classifying all other condition class variables, base
the classification on the annular plot.
Specific instructions for the classification of each attribute follow.
4.300 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER -- On a plot, assign and record a
unique identifying number for each condition class. At the time of the
plot establishment, the condition class at plot center (the center of
subplot 1) is designated condition class 1. Other condition classes are
assigned numbers sequentially at the time each condition class is
delineated. On a plot, each sampled condition class must have a
unique number that can change at remeasurement to reflect new
conditions on the plot.
When collected: All condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
CONDITION CLASS DEFINING (MAPPING) VARIABLES:
4.310 CONDITION STATUS -- Record the code that describes the
status of the condition. Record for all condition classes sampled on a
plot. The instructions beginning on page 40 (“Determination of Condition
Class”) and the instructions starting on the following page (“Determining
Condition Classes Differing in Condition Status”) apply when delineating
condition classes that differ by CONDITION STATUS.
When collected: All condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
42
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Accessible forestland
Nonforest land
Noncensus water
Census water
Denied access area
Area too hazardous to visit
Area that is not in the sample, e.g., in Canada or
Mexico.
DETERMINING CONDITION CLASSES DIFFERING IN CONDITION
STATUS:
The first step in delineating condition classes is to recognize differences
in CONDITION STATUS. The most common difference is adjacent
accessible forestland and nonforest land. Adjacent accessible forest
land and nonforest land condition classes are recognized only if each of
the two prospective condition classes is at least 1.0 ac in size, and each
is at least 120.0 ft in width. These size and width minimums apply to
both accessible forestland and nonforest land.
Within an accessible forest land condition class, unimproved roads, rock
outcrops, and natural nonforest openings less than 1.0 ac in size and
less than 120.0 ft in width are considered forest land and are not
delineated and classified as a separate nonforest condition class.
Within a nonforest land condition class, forested areas or linear strips of
trees less than 1.0 ac in size and less than 120.0 ft in width are
considered part of the nonforest condition class.
Five exceptions to these size and width requirements apply:
1.
Distinct, alternating strips of forest and nonforest land: this
situation occurs when a plot or subplot samples a condition
class that is less than 1.0 ac in size and less than 120.0 ft in
width. The condition class is one of a series of parallel strips of
forest and nonforest land in which none of the strips meet the
minimum width requirement.
For many small, intermingled strips, determine the total area
that the alternating strips occupy, and classify according to the
CONDITION STATUS (forest land or nonforest land) that
occupies the greater area. If the area of alternating strips is so
large or indistinct as to make a total area determination
impractical, then classify the sample as forestland.
For two alternating strips of forest and nonforest between two
qualifying areas of nonforest land and forestland, see Figure 2.
Any subplot that falls in the alternating strips uses the rule.
43
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Any subplot that falls in assigned nonforest / forest is assigned
that type.
Nonforest land
greater than 120
ft wide
Strip of Forest
less than 120
ft wide
Strip of
Nonforest
less than 120
ft wide
Forestland
greater than 120
ft wide
PC
NF
PC
F
PC
NF
PC
F
Figure 2.
Example of alternating strips of forested and
nonforested conditions.
44
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
2.
Developed nonforest inclusions: human-caused nonforest land
condition classes such as homes or cabins that are less than
1.0 ac in size and 120.0 ft in width and are surrounded by
forest land. All extensions from developed nonforest inclusions
are nonforest condition classes regardless of length or width.
There are three kinds of developed nonforest inclusions that do
not have to meet area or width requirements.
a)
Improved roads: paved roads, gravel roads, or
improved dirt roads regularly maintained for long-term
continuing use. Unimproved traces and roads created
for skidding logs are not considered improved roads
b)
Maintained rights-of-way: corridors created for
railroads, power lines, gas lines, and canals that are
periodically treated to limit the establishment and
growth of trees and shrubs.
c)
Developments: structures and the maintained area
next to a structure, all less than 1.0 ac in size and
surrounded by forest land.
Examples of
developments are houses or trailers on very small
lots, communication installations in a small cleared
area within forest land, and barns and sheds.
45
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.
Figure 3.
4.
The 120 foot minimum width for mapping does not apply when
a corner angle is 90 degrees or greater (Figure 3).
Illustration of the 90-degree corner rule. The dotted lines
do not create nonforest conditions.
Linear water features: natural water features that are linear in
shape such as streams and rivers. A linear water feature must
meet the definition for Census or noncensus water to be
nonforest area. Therefore, a linear water feature must be at
least 30.0 ft wide and cover at least 1.0 ac. The width of a
linear water feature is measured across its channel between
points on either side up to which water prevents the
establishment and survival of trees. To determine whether a
linear water feature qualifies as nonforest, rely on all available
information on hand such as aerial photos, topographic maps,
past survey land calls, and ocular estimates at the current
survey visit. Linear water features that do not meet the
definition for Census or noncensus water should be classified
as forestland only if bounded by forestland on both shores.
Crews are NOT expected to measure the length of a linear
water feature to determine if it meets the 1.0 ac requirement;
use professional judgment and common sense on any linear
water feature.
46
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
5.
Riparian forest area: A riparian forest area is defined as a
forest area between 30.0 and 120.0 ft wide, and 1.0 ac or more
in size, cumulative, but not necessarily present on both sides of
and adjacent to a naturally occurring or artificially created body
of water or watercourse with continuous or intermittent flow.
Riparian forest areas may be associated with but not limited to
streams, rivers, lakes, sloughs, seeps, springs, marsh, beaver
ponds, sink holes, cypress domes and ponds, man-made
ditches and canals. A riparian forest area must be associated
“within forest” and contain at least one distinct and obvious
change in a condition class mapping attribute from its adjacent
accessible forestland condition class.
CONDITION STATUS DEFINITIONS:
ACCESSIBLE FOREST LAND – Code 1
Land that is within the population of interest, is accessible, is
on a subplot that can be occupied at subplot center, can safely
be visited, and meets at least one of the two following criteria:
(a) The condition is at least 10-percent stocked by
trees of any size (Appendix 6) or has been at
least 10-percent stocked in the past. Additionally,
the condition is not subject to nonforest use(s)
that prevent normal tree regeneration and
succession such as regular mowing, intensive
grazing, or recreation activities;
or
(b) in several western woodland types where
stocking cannot be determined, and the condition
has at least 5 percent crown cover by trees of any
size, or has had at least 5 percent cover in the
past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to
nonforest use that prevents normal regeneration
and succession such as regular mowing,
chaining, or recreation activities.
47
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
To qualify as forest land, the prospective condition must be at least 1.0
ac in size and 120.0 ft wide measured stem-to-stem. Forested strips
must be 120.0 ft wide for a continuous length of at least 363.0 ft in order
to meet the acre threshold. Forested strips that do not meet these
requirements are classified as part of the adjacent nonforest land.
Transition zones and forest/nonforest encroachment.
When an
accessible forestland condition encroaches into a nonforest condition,
the border between forest and nonforest is often a gradual change in
tree cover or stocking with no clear and abrupt boundary. In addition, it
may be difficult to determine exactly where the forested area meets the
minimum stocking criteria and where it does not. For these cases,
determine where the land clearly meets the 10% minimum forest land
stocking, and where it clearly is less than required stocking; divide the
zone between these points in half, and determine the side of the zone
on which the subplot center is located. Classify the condition class of
the subplot based on this line (Figure 4).
Figure 4.
Example of classifying the condition class of the subplot in
a transition zone with forest/nonforest encroachment.
48
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
For example, at measurement time 1, a clear and distinct boundary
existed between the forest and nonforest condition classes. At time 2,
however, there now exists a zone of regeneration or small diameter
trees between the previous forest condition and where the nonforest
clearly remains. If the zone of encroachment is clearly stocked where it
meets the nonforest, classify the entire zone as forest. If the zone is
clearly nonforest up to the original stand, call it all nonforest. If the
encroachment or transition zone is not clearly stocked where it meets
the nonforest, determine where it is clearly stocked (forest) and where it
is clearly not stocked (nonforest); divide this zone in half, and classify
the entire subplot based on which side of the line the subplot center
falls.
Treated strips – Occasionally, crews will come across plantations of
trees, in which rows of trees alternate with strips of vegetation that have
been bulldozed, mowed, tilled, treated with herbicide, or crushed.
Because these strip treatments are conducted to optimize growth or to
release the stand, the areas are considered forestland, and the
treatment is considered a timber stand improvement operation. Do not
confuse these practices with similar treatments on nonforest lands such
as yards or rights-of-way. Contact with the land owner may help
determine the intent of a treatment.
Indistinct boundary due to the condition minimum-width definition: Do
not subdivide subplots where a condition class may change due only to
the forest vs. nonforest minimum width (120.0 ft) definition. Although
the point where the definition changes from forest to nonforest creates
an invisible “line” between conditions, this definitional boundary is not
distinct and obvious. See Figures 5 and 6. Where the point of the
definition change occurs on the subplot, determine only if the subplot
center is on the forest or nonforest side of that approximate boundary,
and classify the entire subplot based on the condition of the subplot
center. If the boundary crosses through the center of the subplot,
classify the subplot as the condition it most resembles. If the boundary
occurs between subplots, classify each subplot based on its relation to
the definitional boundary.
49
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
120 ft
Figure 5. Forest condition narrows within a nonforest
condition. Examine the location of the subplot center
in reference to the approximate line where the forest
narrows to 120 ft wide. In this example, the entire
subplot is classified as forest.
120 ft
Figure 6. Nonforest condition narrows within a forest
condition. Examine the location of the subplot center
in reference to the approximate line where the
nonforest narrows to 120 ft wide. In this example, the
entire subplot is classified as forest.
50
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
NONFOREST LAND – Code 2
Nonforest land is any land within the sample that does not meet the
definition of accessible forestland or any of the CONDITION STATUS
values defined in codes 3 through 7. To qualify, the area must be at
least 1.0 ac in size and 120.0 ft wide, with 5 exceptions discussed
previously beginning on page 43. Do not consider evidence of
"possible" or future development or conversion. A nonforest land
condition will remain in the sample and will be examined at the next
occasion to see if it has become forestland.
NONCENSUS WATER – Code 3
Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 1.0 ac to 4.5 ac in
size. Rivers, streams, canals, etc., 30.0 ft to 200 ft wide.
CENSUS WATER – Code 4
Lakes, reservoirs, ponds, and similar bodies of water 4.5 ac in size and
larger; and rivers, streams, canals, etc., more than 200 ft wide (1990
U.S. Census definition).
DENIED ACCESS – Code 5
Any area within the sampled area on a plot on which access is denied
by the legal owner of the land the plot falls on, or by an owner of the only
reasonable route to the plot. There are no minimum area or width
requirements for a condition class delineated by denied access.
Because a denied-access condition can become accessible in the
future, it remains in the sample and is re-examined at the next occasion
to determine if access is available.
HAZARDOUS – Code 6
Any area within the sampled area on plot that cannot be accessed
because of a hazard or danger, for example cliffs, quarries, strip mines,
illegal plantations, temporary high water, etc. Although the hazard is not
likely to change over time, a hazardous condition remains in the sample
and is re-examined at the next occasion to determine if the hazard is still
present. There are no minimum size or width requirements for a
condition class delineated by a hazardous condition.
51
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
NOT IN THE SAMPLE – Code 7
Any area within the sampled area on a plot that is not within the
boundaries of the sample population of interest. Examples of areas out
of the sample would be plots or portions of plots falling in Mexico,
Canada, and areas that are not currently participating in FIA such as
National Forest land in California, Oregon, Washington, or BLM land in
western Washington. A condition outside the sample area remains in
the potential population of interest and is re-examined at the next
occasion to determine if it becomes part of the population of interest.
There are no minimum size or width requirements for a condition class
delineated as out of the sample.
DETERMINING CONDITION
FOREST LAND:
CLASSES
WITHIN
ACCESSIBLE
Accessible forestland is subdivided into condition classes that are based
on differences in LAND USE, FOREST TYPE, STAND SIZE CLASS,
REGENERATION STATUS, RESERVED STATUS, TREE DENSITY,
and OWNER GROUP. “Determination of Condition Class” applies when
delineating contrasting forest condition classes. Specific criteria apply
for each of the seven attributes and are documented by attribute in
subsections within 4.320 to 4.380. “Stands” are defined by plurality of
stocking for all live trees that are not overtopped.
Additionally, each separate forest condition class recognized within
accessible forestland must be at least 1.0 ac in size and at least 120.0 ft
in width. If prospective contrasting forestland condition classes do not
each meet these minimum size and width requirements, the most similar
prospective conditions should be combined until these minimums are
attained.
No other attribute shall be the basis for recognizing contrasting condition
classes.
For each condition class recognized, several “ancillary
attributes” that help describe the condition will be collected, but will not
be used for mapping purposes (see Sections 4.400 to 4.470).
General instructions for delineating condition classes within accessible
forestland:
1.
Distinct boundary within an annular plot (if applicable), subplot,
or microplot: Separate condition classes ARE recognized if,
within a subplot, two (or more) distinctly different condition
classes are present and delineated by a distinct, abrupt
boundary. The boundary is referenced; see page 89.
52
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
2.
Indistinct boundary within a subplot: Separate condition classes
are NOT recognized if the prospective condition classes abut
along an indistinct transition zone, rather than on an abrupt,
obvious boundary. Only one condition is recognized, and the
subplot is classified entirely as the condition it most resembles.
Example: The four subplots all sample only accessible
forest land. Subplots 1, 3, and 4 sample what is clearly a
stand of large diameter trees. Subplot 2 falls in the middle
of a stand size transition zone. In the zone, the large
diameter stand phases into a sapling stand.
Subplot 2 must not be divided into two mapped condition
classes on the basis of stand size. Instead, it is treated
entirely as part of the large diameter condition class or is
assigned entirely to a new condition class that is classified
as a seedling-sapling stand. The latter occurs only if the
crew thinks the entire subplot is more like a stand of
seedling-saplings than a stand of large diameter trees;
then the boundary between the large and small diameter
stands is assumed to occur between and not on the
subplots.
3.
A boundary or transition zone between fixed radii plots that
sample distinctly different condition classes: Separate condition
classes are recognized and recorded when a valid attribute
obviously differs between two fixed radius plots, but a distinct
boundary or indistinct transition zone exists outside the
sampled (fixed-radius) area of the subplots. In such cases, a
boundary, if present, is not referenced.
Example: The northernmost subplot (2) samples entirely
accessible forestland. The other three subplots, 1, 3, and
4, fall clearly in a nonforest meadow. Between subplot 1
and 2 is a transition zone; the number of trees present
goes from none to what clearly represents at least 10percent tree stocking. Two condition classes are sampled:
accessible forestland sampled on subplot 2, and nonforest
land sampled on the other subplots.
53
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.320 Land Use Class
The following land use definitions and codes contain new definitions and
codes that are used to describe Other Forest Land. The concept of
Other Forest Land is a significant departure from the way land use has
previously been classified by FIA at the Northeastern Research Station.
All field employees are advised to read this section carefully, and to ask
questions if there are any concerns. It is your obligation to understand
these instructions and apply them consistently.
Assign a current land use class for each condition class that occurs on a
plot or subplot. To qualify as a separate land use, the area in question
must be an area at least one acre in size (strips must be at least 120
feet wide), on which the predominant land use is the same. A strip that
is 120 feet wide would have to be 363 feet long in order to be one acre
(43,560 square feet) in size. Inclusions of less than one acre, with two
exceptions, are considered the same land use. The exceptions are: (1)
maintained rights-of-way, which are nonforest land (codes 73 or 74),
regardless of their width, and (2) any permanent features such as
buildings.
********************************************************************************
Field crews are required to notify a supervisor of all plots that are
assigned a Land Use Class that differs from the Previous Land Use
Class or the current PI Class, within one week of the date that the
plot was completed.
********************************************************************************
LAND USE DEFINITIONS
FOREST LAND
Land at least 10 percent stocked by forest trees of any size, or land that
formerly had such tree cover and is not currently developed for a
nonforest use. The minimum area for classification as forestland is one
acre. Roadside, streamside, and shelterbelt strips of timber must have
a crown width at least 120 feet to qualify as forestland. Unimproved
roads and trails, streams and other bodies of water, or natural clearings
in forested areas shall be classified as forest, if less than 120 feet in
width or an acre in size. Grazed woodlands, reverting fields, and
pastures that are not actively maintained are included if the above
qualifications are satisfied. Also, see definitions of nonforest land, idle
farmland and improved/maintained pasture.
NOTE: See the explanation of Stocking Levels in Appendix 6.
54
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
TIMBERLAND -- Code 20
Forestland that is producing or capable of producing crops of industrial
wood and is not withdrawn from timber utilization by statute or
administrative designation. (Land withdrawn from timber utilization must
be publicly owned land. See the definitions of Reserved, Unproductive
Reserved, and Reserved Other Forest land.)
NOTE: Areas qualifying as timberland have the capability of producing
in excess of 20 cubic feet per acre per year of industrial wood under
management.
Currently inaccessible and inoperable areas are
included, except when the areas involved are small and unlikely to
become suitable for the production of industrial wood in the foreseeable
future.
Timberland may be nonstocked provided that neither any natural
condition, nor any activity by humans, prevents or inhibits the
establishment of tree seedlings.
********************************************************************************
OTHER FOREST LAND -- Code 30
Forestland that is producing, or capable of producing, crops of industrial
wood, but is associated with, or part of a nonforest land use. In the
past, these areas would have been treated as inclusions in the
nonforest land use because they were considered part of a
development. The minimum area for classification as other forestland is
one acre. Roadside, streamside, and shelterbelt strips of timber must
have a crown width at least 120 feet wide to qualify as other forestland.
Unimproved roads and trails, streams and other bodies of water, or
natural clearings in forested areas classified as Other Forest shall also
be classified as Other Forest, if less than 120 feet in width or an acre in
size. Some examples of land that could be classified as other forest
land are forested portions of city parks, forested land in highway
medians and rights-of way, forested areas between ski runs, and
forested areas within golf courses. Generally, although surrounded by
nonforest development, these areas have not been developed
themselves, and exhibit natural, undisturbed understories.
UNPRODUCTIVE OTHER FOREST LAND -- Code 31
Other forestland that is incapable of producing 20 cubic feet per acre
per year of industrial wood under natural conditions, because of adverse
site conditions.
55
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
NOTE: Adverse conditions include sterile soils, dry climate, poor
drainage, high elevation, steepness, and rockiness. Vegetation, if
present, is widely spaced and scrubby, or tree growth cannot become
established.
OTHER
FOREST
LAND
RESERVED
ADMINISTRATIVE DECISION -- Code 32
by
STATUTE
or
Other forestland that is sufficiently productive to qualify as timberland,
but is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or by law.
UNPRODUCTIVE RESERVED OTHER FOREST LAND -- Code 33
Other forest land that is incapable of producing 20 cubic feet per acre
per year of industrial wood under natural conditions, because of adverse
site conditions, and is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public
agency or by law.
NOTE: Adverse conditions include sterile soils, dry climate, poor
drainage, high elevation, steepness, and rockiness. Vegetation, if
present, is widely spaced and scrubby, or tree growth cannot be
established.
********************************************************************************
UNPRODUCTIVE FOREST LAND -- Code 40
Forestland that is incapable of producing 20 cubic feet per acre per year
of industrial wood under natural conditions, because of adverse site
conditions.
NOTE: Adverse conditions include sterile soils, dry climate, poor
drainage, high elevation, steepness, and rockiness. Vegetation, if
present, is widely spaced and scrubby, or tree growth cannot become
established.
UNPRODUCTIVE RESERVED FOREST LAND -- Code 41
Forest land that is incapable of producing 20 cubic feet per acre per
year of industrial wood under natural conditions, because of adverse site
conditions, and is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or
by law.
NOTE: Adverse conditions include sterile soils, dry climate, poor
drainage, high elevation, steepness, and rockiness. Vegetation, if
present, is widely spaced and scrubby, or tree growth cannot be
established.
56
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
RESERVED by STATUTE or ADMINISTRATIVE DECISION -- Code 50
Forestland that is sufficiently productive to qualify as timberland, but is
withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or by law.
CHRISTMAS TREE PLANTATIONS -- Code 51
Forestland that is sufficiently productive to qualify as timberland, but is
withdrawn from timber utilization for exclusive use in Christmas tree
production. There must be evidence of annual shearing, or other
management practices that indicate the exclusive use. (See Appendix 5
for specific instructions.)
URBAN FOREST LAND -- Code 52
Land that, except for its location, would ordinarily be classified as
timberland. This land is either nearly (surrounded on three sides), or
completely, surrounded by urban development, whether commercial,
industrial or residential. This land meets all of the criteria for timberland,
that is, at least one acre; capable of producing at least 20 cubic feet per
acre per year of industrial wood; is not developed for some use other
than timber production; is not reserved by a public agency. It is
extremely unlikely that such land would be used for timber products on a
continuing basis. Such land may be held for future development, or
scheduled for development. (The timber that is present may be utilized
only at the time of development.) The land may be undeveloped due to
periodic flooding, low wet sites, steep slopes, or their proximity to
industrial facilities that are unfavorable to residential development.
Forested areas within city parks are not urban forest land. They may be
Other Forest Land if the requirements for Other Forest Land are met,
otherwise, they would be nonforest land. City Parks cannot be classified
as Urban Forest Land as it is currently defined.
57
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
NONFOREST LAND
Land that does not support, or has never supported, forests, and lands
formerly forested where use for timber management is precluded by
development for other uses. (Note: Includes areas used for crops,
maintained/ improved pasture, residential areas, city parks, improved
roads of any width and adjoining rights-of-way, power line clearings of
any width, and noncensus water.) If intermingled in forest areas,
unimproved roads and nonforest strips must be more than 120 feet
wide, and clearings, etc., more than one acre in size, to qualify as
nonforest land. Although there may be some stocking, the critical
classification factor is the predominant use being made of the land. Do
not confuse with urban forest land.
NONFOREST LAND WITH TREES
This is a land use on which trees 5 inches DBH and larger are present,
but the predominant use is other than forest land.
Following are the nonforest definitions and codes. Enter odd numbered
codes are for nonforest land uses without trees and the even numbered
codes for nonforest land with trees.
CROPLAND ⎯ without trees Code 61 with trees Code 62
Land that currently supports agricultural crops including silage and feed
grains, bare farm fields resulting from cultivation or harvest, and
maintained orchards and nurseries.
IMPROVED / MAINTAINED PASTURE -- without trees Code 63
trees Code 64
with
Land maintained and used and for grazing (not including grazed
cropland). Evidence of maintenance, besides the degree of grazing,
includes condition of fencing, presence of stock ponds, periodic brush
removal, seeding, or mowing. Land that generally has less than 10
percent stocking in live trees (established seedlings or larger trees),
except that occasional large trees with the obvious function of providing
shade for livestock, and small single trees or clusters of hawthorn or
eastern redcedar should be ignored when determining stocking.
Grazing should be so intense that forest reproduction (except for
hawthorn and eastern redcedar) could not occur naturally -- this would
be evident if all other vegetation were closely browsed.
58
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
IDLE FARMLAND -- without trees Code 65 with trees Code 66
Former cropland or pasture that has not been tended within the last 2
years and that has less than 10 percent stocking with live trees,
(established seedlings or larger trees) regardless of species. (Note: A
field that is between crop rotations should not be called idle, however,
cropland.)
OTHER FARMLAND -- without trees Code 67 with trees Code 68
Other farmland is all nonforest land on a farm excluding cropland,
pasture, and idle farmland. It includes farm lanes, stock pens, and
farmsteads. Specify the specific land use in the General Notes
BOG (nonforest) -- Code 69
Wet, spongy land characteristically having a thick layer of peat. It is rich
in plant residues, usually acidic, and frequently surrounds a body of
open water. Characteristic florae are sedges, heaths, and sphagnum.
NOTE: Bogs are not always nonforest. Some tree species such as
black spruce can adapt to bog conditions. If the stocking requirement is
met, the land is considered forestland. The decision as to whether the
land is productive or unproductive will be made by the field crews. (LU
20 or 40).
MARSH -- Code 70
A tract of soft, wet land, often periodically inundated and always
treeless. It is usually characterized by grasses, cattails or other
monocotyledons (i.e., lilies, lady slippers, sedges).
SALT MARSH -- Code 71
Flat land that is subject to intermittent or occasional overflow by salt
water, containing water that is brackish to strongly saline. A salt marsh
supports saltwater adapted plants that usually consist chiefly of grasses.
59
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
SWAMP (nonforest) -- Code 72
Wet, spongy land saturated and sometimes partially or intermittently
covered with water.
Such land supports natural vegetation
predominantly of shrubs, and/or trees.
NOTE: Swamps are not always nonforest. Some tree species readily
adapt to the swamp conditions. If the stocking requirement is met, the
land is considered forestland. The decision of whether the land is
productive or unproductive will be made by the field crews. (LU 20 or
40)
RIGHTS - of - WAY -- without trees Code 73 with trees Code 74
Highways, railroads, airports, pipelines, power lines, canals
MINING and WASTE LAND -- without trees Code 75
76
with trees Code
Surface mining, gravel pits, dumps, landfills.
DEVELOPED RECREATION SITE -- without trees Code 77 with trees
Code 78
Parks, campgrounds, playing fields, athletic and sports tracks.
INDUSTRIAL / COMMERCIAL LAND -- without trees Code 79
trees Code 80
with
Supply yards, parking lots, shopping centers, factories, etc.
MULTIPLE FAMILY HOUSING -- without trees Code 81
Code 82
with trees
More than one family household per structure, for example,
condominiums, townhouses, row houses and apartment buildings.
SINGLE FAMILY HOUSING -- without trees Code 83 with trees Code
84
One family or person per structure
OTHER -- without trees Code 85 with trees Code 86
Includes any category of nonforest land use not mentioned previously.
Describe each situation, in detail, in the General Notes section.
60
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
CENSUS WATER -- Land Use Code 91
Rivers that are more than 200 feet wide or bodies of water that are more
than 4.5 acres in size (includes lakes, the ocean, reservoirs). This
category is not sampled. If a new plot falls in census water, it should be
turned in and an alternate plot will be selected. If a remeasure plot now
falls in census water, record a land use of 91, reconcile any trees that
may have been present on the last occasion, and turn in the plot.
NONCENSUS WATER -- Code 92
Noncensus water includes streams and rivers between 30 feet and 200
feet in width, and bodies of water between 1 and 4.5 acres in size. The
Bureau of Census classifies such water as land and therefore it will be
sampled. It should be treated as any other nonforest land use.
4.330 FOREST TYPE -- Record the code corresponding to the FOREST
TYPE (see Appendix 2, Forest Type Algorithm) that best describes the
species with the plurality of stocking for all live trees in the condition
class that are not overtopped.
The instructions in “Determination of Condition Class” and “Determining
Condition Classes Differing in Condition Status” apply when delineating,
within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on
differences in FOREST TYPE.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors in group, 100% of the time; No errors in type, at least
95% of the time
Values:
Code
Forest Type
100
WHITE / RED / JACK PINE GROUP
101
Jack pine: Associates -- red pine, northern pin oak, quaking
and bigtooth aspen, paper birch, black spruce, and white
spruce. Sites -- generally driest, most porous sands but also
on more moist, sandy soils near swamps and on rocky hills and
ledges.
102
Red pine: Associates -- white, jack, or pitch pine; northern pin
oak; white oak; red maple; paper birch; quaking and bigtooth
aspen, chestnut oak, northern red oak, and hemlock. Sites -spotty distribution in Northeast and sandy and gravelly
locations or dry sandy loam soils; often in plantations.
61
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Forest Type
103
White pine: Associates -- pitch pine, gray birch, aspen, red
maple, pin cherry, white oak, paper birch, sweet birch, yellow
birch, black cherry, white ash, northern red oak, sugar maple,
basswood, hemlock, northern white-cedar, yellow-poplar, white
oak, chestnut oak, scarlet oak, and shortleaf pine. Sites -wide variety, but best development on well-drained sands and
sandy loams.
104
White pine / hemlock: Associates -- beech, sugar maple,
basswood, red maple, yellow birch, black cherry, white ash,
paper birch, sweet birch, northern red oak, white oak, chestnut
oak, yellow-poplar, and cucumber tree. Sites -- prefer cool
locations, moist ravines, and north slopes.
105
Hemlock: Associates -- beech, sugar maple, yellow birch,
basswood, red maple, black cherry, white ash, white pine,
paper birch, sweet birch, northern red oak, white oak. Sites -prefer cool locations, moist ravines, and north slopes.
120
SPRUCE / FIR GROUP
121
Balsam fir: Associates -- black, white, or red spruce; paper or
yellow birch; quaking or bigtooth aspen, beech; red maple;
hemlock; tamarack; black ash; or northern white-cedar. Sites - upland sites on low lying moist flats and in swamps.
122
White spruce: Associates -- black spruce, balsam fir, quaking
aspen, paper birch, jack pine, red spruce, sugar maple, beech,
and yellow birch. Sites -- moist, sandy loam or alluvial soilsfound on many different sites but especially typical of stream
banks, lake shores, and adjacent slopes.
123
Red Spruce: Associates -- vary widely and may include red
maple, yellow birch, eastern hemlock, eastern white pine, white
spruce, northern white-cedar, paper birch, pin cherry, gray
birch, mountain ash, beech, striped maple, sugar maple,
northern red oak, red pine, and aspen. Sites -- include
moderately well drained to poorly drained flats and thin-slopes
and on varying acidic soils in abandoned fields and pastures.
Use this code where red spruce comprises a plurality or
majority of the stand's stocking but where balsam fir is either
nonexistent or has very little stocking. Otherwise, code the plot
as 124, red spruce/balsam fir.
62
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Forest Type
124
Red spruce / balsam fir: Associates -- red maple, paper
birch, white pine, hemlock, white spruce, and northern whitecedar. Sites -- moderately drained to poorly drained flats, or on
thin-soiled upper slopes.
125
Black spruce: Associates -- white spruce, balsam fir, jack
pine, quaking aspen, paper birch, tamarack, northern whitecedar, black ash, or red maple. Sites -- acid peat swamps but
also on moist flats and uplands.
126
Tamarack (eastern larch): Associates -- northern white
cedar, red maple, black ash, and quaking aspen. Sites -- wet
swamps.
127
Northern white-cedar: Associates -- tamarack, yellow birch,
paper birch, black ash, red maple, white pine, and hemlock.
Sites -- slow drainage (not stagnant bogs) areas that are not
strongly acid.
160
LOBLOLLY AND SHORTLEAF PINE GROUP
161
Loblolly pine: Associates -- sweetgum, southern red oak,
post oak, blackjack oak, blackgum, yellow-poplar, and pond
pine. Sites -- in Delaware and Maryland both on upland soils
with abundant moisture but good drainage and on poorly
drained depressions.
162
Shortleaf pine: Associates -- white oak, southern red oak,
scarlet oak, black oak, hickory, post oak, blackjack oak,
blackgum, red maple, pitch pine, and Virginia pine. Sites -low, well-drained ridges to rocky, dry, south slopes and the
better drained spur ridges on north slopes and also on old
fields.
163
Virginia pine: Associates -- shortleaf pine, white oak, chestnut
oak, southern red oak, black oak, sweetgum, red maple,
blackgum, and pitch pine. Sites -- dry sites, often abandoned
fields.
165
Table-mountain pine: Associates -- chestnut oak, scarlet
oak, pitch pine, pine, and black oak. Sites -- poor, dry, often
rocky slopes.
63
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Forest Type
166
Pond pine:
Associates -- loblolly pine, sweetgum,
baldcypress, and Atlantic white-cedar. Sites -- rare, but found
in southern New Jersey, Delaware and Maryland in low, poorly
drained acres, swamps, and marshes.
167
Pitch pine: Associates -- chestnut oak, scarlet oak, tablemountain pine, black oak, and blackgum. Sites -- relatively
infertile ridges, dry flats and slopes.
180
PINYON / JUNIPER GROUP
181
Eastern redcedar: Associates -- gray birch, red maple, sweet
birch, Virginia Pine, shortleaf pine, oak. Sites -- usually dry
uplands and abandoned fields on limestone outcrops and other
shallow soils but can grow well on good sites.
380
EXOTIC SOFTWOODS GROUP
381
Scotch pine: Plantation type, not naturally occurring.
383
Norway spruce: plantation type, not naturally occurring.
383
Larch (introduced): plantation type, usually Japanese larch,
European larch, or a hybrid of the two (Dunkeld larch) - not
naturally occurring. Sites -- well-drained uplands; numerous
plantations in New York.
400
OAK / PINE GROUP
401
White pine / northern red oak / white ash: Associates -- red
maple, basswood, yellow birch, bigtooth aspen, sugar maple,
beech, paper birch, black cherry, hemlock, and sweet birch.
Sites -- deep, fertile, well-drained soil.
402
Eastern redcedar / hardwood: Associates -- oak, hickory,
walnut, ash, locust, dogwood, blackgum, hackberry, winged
elm, shortleaf pine, and Virginia pine. Sites -- usually dry
uplands and abandoned fields.
404
Shortleaf pine / oak: Associates -- (oaks generally include
white, scarlet, blackjack, black, post, and southern red) hickory,
blackgum, sweetgum, Virginia pine, and pitch pine. Sites -generally on dry, low ridges, flats, and south slopes.
64
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Forest Type
405
Virginia pine / southern red oak: Associates -- black oak,
scarlet oak, white oak, post oak, blackjack oak, shortleaf pine,
blackgum, hickory, pitch pine, table-mountain pine, chestnut
oak. Sites -- dry slopes and ridges.
406
Loblolly pine / hardwood: Associates -- wide variety of moist
and wet site hardwoods including blackgum, sweetgum, yellowpoplar, red maple, white and green ash, and American elm; on
drier sites associates include southern and northern red oak,
white oak, post oak, scarlet oak, persimmon, and hickory. Sites
-- usually moist to very moist though not wet all year, but also
on drier sites.
409
Other oak / pine: catchall type for other unnamed pinehardwood combinations that meet the stocking requirements
for oak-pine.
500
OAK / HICKORY GROUP
501
Post / blackjack oak: Associates – northern pin oak, dwarf
post oak, southern red oak, hickory, white oak, scarlet oak,
shingle oak, live oak, shortleaf pine, Virginia pine, blackgum,
sourwood, red maple, winged elm, hackberry, chinkapin oak,
shumard oak, dogwood, and eastern redcedar. Sites -- dry
uplands and ridges.
502
Chestnut oak: Associates -- scarlet oak, white oak, black oak,
post oak, pitch pine, blackgum, sweetgum, red maple, red oak,
shortleaf pine, Virginia pine. Sites -rocky outcrops with thin
soil, ridge tops.
503
White oak / red oak / hickory: Associates -- scarlet oak, bur
oak, pin oak, white ash, sugar maple, red maple, walnut,
basswood, locust, beech, sweetgum, blackgum, yellow-poplar,
and dogwood. Sites -- wide variety of well drained upland soils.
504
White oak: Associates -- black oak, northern red oak, bur oak,
hickory, white ash, yellow-poplar. Sites -- scattered patches on
upland, loamy soils but on drier sites than type 503.
505
Northern red oak: Associates -- black oak, scarlet oak,
chestnut oak, and yellow-poplar. Sites -- spotty distribution on
ridge crests and north slopes in mountains but also found on
rolling land, slopes, and benches on loamy soil.
65
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Forest Type
506
Yellow-poplar / white oak / northern red oak: Associates -black oak, hemlock, blackgum, and hickory. Sites -- northern
slopes, coves, and moist flats.
507
Sassafras / persimmon: Associates -- elm, eastern redcedar,
hickory, ash, sugar maple, yellow-poplar, and oaks. Sites -abandoned farmlands and old fields.
508
Sweetgum / yellow-poplar: Associates -- red maple, white
ash, green ash, and other moist site hardwoods. Sites -generally occupy moist, lower slopes.
510
Scarlet oak: Associates -- black oak, southern red oak,
chestnut oak, white oak, post oak, hickory, pitch pine,
blackgum, sweetgum, black locust, sourwood, dogwood,
shortleaf pine, and Virginia pine. Sites -- dry ridges, south- or
west- facing slopes and flats, but often moister situations
probably as a result of logging or fire.
511
Yellow-poplar: Associates -- black locust, red maple, sweet
birch, cucumber tree, and other moist-site hardwoods (except
sweetgum (see type 508) and white oak and northern red oak
(see type 506). Sites -- lower slopes, northerly slopes, moist
coves, flats, and old fields.
512
Black walnut: Associates -- yellow-poplar, white ash, black
cherry, basswood, beech, sugar maple, oaks, and hickory.
Sites -- coves and well-drained bottoms.
513
Black locust: Associates -- many species of hardwoods and
hard pines may occur with it in mixture, either having been
planted or from natural seeding. Sites -- may occur on any
well-drained soil but best on dry sites, often in old fields.
519
Red maple / oak: Associates -- the type is dominated by red
maple and some of the wide variety of central hardwood
associates include upland oak, hickory, yellow-poplar, black
locust, sassafras as well as some central softwoods like
Virginia and shortleaf pines. Sites -- uplands.
520
Mixed upland hardwoods: Associates -- Any mixture of
hardwoods of species typical of the upland central hardwood
region, should include at least some oak. Sites -- wide variety
of upland sites.
66
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Forest Type
600
OAK / GUM / CYPRESS GROUP
601
Swamp chestnut oak / cherrybark oak: Associates -- white
ash, hickory, white oak, Shumard oak, blackgum, sweetgum,
southern red oak, post oak, American elm, winged elm, yellowpoplar, and beech. Sites -- within alluvial flood plains of major
rivers on all ridges in the terraces, and on the best fine sandy
loam soils on the highest first bottom ridges.
602
Sweetgum / Nuttall oak / willow oak: Associates -- green
ash, American elm, pecan, cottonwood, red maple,
honeylocust, and persimmon. Sites -- very wet.
605
Overcup oak / water hickory: Associates -- willow oak,
American elm, green ash, hackberry, persimmon, and red
maple. Sites -- in the South, within alluvial flood plains in low,
poorly drained flats with clay soils. Also, in sloughs and lowest
backwater basins and low ridges with heavy soils that are
subject to late spring inundation.
606
Atlantic white-cedar: Associates -- North includes gray birch,
pitch pine, hemlock, blackgum, and red maple: South includes
pond pine, baldcypress, and red maple. Sites -- usually
confined to sandy-bottomed, peaty, interior, and river swamps,
wet depressions, and stream banks.
607
Baldcypress / water tupelo: Associates -- willow, red maple,
American elm, persimmon, overcup oak, and sweetgum. Sites
-- very low, poorly drained flats, deep sloughs, and swamps wet
most all the year.
608
Sweetbay / swamp tupelo / red maple: Associates -blackgum, loblolly and pond pine, American elm, and other
moist-site hardwoods. Sites -- very moist but seldom wet all
year--shallow ponds, muck swamps, along smaller creeks in
Coastal Plain (rare in Northeast).
700
ELM / ASH / RED MAPLE GROUP
701
Black ash / American elm / red maple: Associates -- silver
maple, swamp white oak, sycamore, pin oak, blackgum, white
ash, and cottonwood. Sites -- moist to wet areas, swamps,
gullies, and poorly drained flats.
67
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Forest Type
702
River birch / sycamore: Associates -- red maple, black
willow, and other moist-site hardwoods. Sites -- moist soils at
edges of creeks and rivers.
703
Cottonwood: Associates -- willow, white ash, green ash, and
sycamore. Sites -- stream banks where bare, moist soil is
available.
704
Willow: Associates -- cottonwood, green ash, sycamore,
pecan, American elm, red maple, and boxelder. Sites -stream banks where bare, moist soil is available.
705
Sycamore / pecan / American elm: Associates -- boxelder,
green ash, hackberry, silver maple, cottonwood, willow,
sweetgum, and river birch. Sites -- bottomlands, alluvial flood
plains of major rivers.
706
Sugarberry / hackberry / American elm / green ash:
Associates -- pecan, blackgum, persimmon, honeylocust, red
maple, hackberry, and boxelder. Sites -- low ridges and flats in
flood plains.
708
Red maple / lowlands: Associates – white ash, green ash
sycamore, American elm, willow and boxelder. Sites – moist to
wet areas, swamps, gullies, and poorly drained flats.
709
Cottonwood / Willow: Associates – white ash, green ash
sycamore, American elm, red maple and boxelder. Sites –
stream banks where bare, moist soil is available.
800
MAPLE / BEECH / BIRCH GROUP
801
Sugar maple / beech / yellow birch:
Associates -basswood, red maple, hemlock, northern red oak, white ash,
white pine, black cherry, sweet birch, American elm, rock elm,
and eastern hophornbeam. Sites -- fertile, moist, well-drained
sites.
802
Black cherry: Associates -- sugar maple, northern red oak,
red maple, white ash, basswood, sweet birch, butternut,
American elm, and hemlock. Sites -- fertile, moist, well-drained
sites.
68
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Forest Type
803
Cherry / ash / yellow-poplar: Associates -- sugar maple,
American beech, northern red oak, white oak, blackgum,
hickory, cucumbertree, and yellow birch. Sites -- fertile, moist,
well-drained sites.
805
Hard maple / basswood: Associates -- white ash, northern
red oak, eastern hophornbeam, American elm, red maple,
eastern white pine, eastern hemlock. Sugar maple and
basswood occur in different proportions but together comprise
the majority of the stocking. Sites -- fertile, moist, well-drained
sites.
807
Elm / ash / locust: Associates -- Locust, silver maple,
boxelder, elm, red maple, green ash predominate. Found in
North Central region, unknown in Northeast. Sites--upland
809
Red maple / uplands: Associates -- the type is dominated by
red maple and some of the wide variety of northern hardwood
associates include sugar maple, beech, birch, aspen, as well
as some northern softwoods like white pine, red pine, and
hemlock; this type is often man-made and may be the result of
repeated cuttings. Sites -- uplands. (See Type 519 under
oak/hickory group)
900
ASPEN / BIRCH GROUP
901
Aspen: Associates -- paper birch, pin cherry, bur oak, green
ash, American elm, balsam poplar, and boxelder. Sites -- all
kinds of soils except driest sands and wettest swamps; found
on burns, clear cuts, and abandoned land.
902
Paper birch: Associates -- aspen, white pine, yellow birch,
hemlock, red maple, northern red oak, and basswood. Sites -wide range of upland site, common on burns or clear cuts.
903
Gray birch: Associates -- oaks, red maple, white pine, and
others. Sites -- poor soils of abandoned farms and burns.
904
Balsam poplar: Associates – balsam fir, white spruce, black
spruce, tamarack, aspen, and paper birch. Sites – uplands
and flood plains.
999
Nonstocked
69
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.340 Stand-Size Class -- Record the code that best describes the
predominant size class of all live trees in the condition class that are not
overtopped.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
0
Nonstocked:
Meeting the definition of accessible forestland and one of the
following applies:
(a) Less than 10 percent stocked by trees of any size,
and not classified as chaparral, or
(b) For forest types where stocking standards are not
available, less than 5 percent crown cover of trees of
any size.
1
Seedling – 4.9 in
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if
stocking tables are not available) in trees of any size; and at
least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees less than 5.0 in DBH.
2
5.0 – 8.9 in (softwoods) / 5.0 – 10.9 in (hardwoods)
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if
stocking tables are not available) in trees of any size; and at
least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 in DBH
and the plurality of the crown cover is in softwoods between
5.0 – 8.9 in diameter and/or hardwoods between 5.0 – 10.9 in
DBH.
3
9.0 – 19.9 in (softwoods) / 11.0 – 19.9 in (hardwoods)
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if
stocking tables are not available) in trees of any size; and at
least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 in DBH
and the plurality of the crown cover is in softwoods between
9.0 – 19.9 in diameter and/or hardwoods between 11.0 – 19.9
in DBH.
70
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4
20.0 – 39.9 in
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if
stocking tables are not available) in trees of any size; and at
least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 in DBH
and the plurality of the crown cover is in trees between 20.0 –
39.9 in DBH.
5
40.0 + in
At least 10 percent stocking (or 5 percent crown cover if
stocking tables are not available) in trees of any size; and at
least 1/3 of the crown cover is in trees greater than 5.0 in DBH
and the plurality of the crown cover is in trees > 40.0 in DBH.
The instructions in “Determination of Condition Class” and “Determining
Condition Classes Differing in Condition Status” apply when delineating,
on accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on differences in
STAND SIZE CLASS.
Within the sampled area on microplot, subplot, or annular plot,
recognize only very obvious contrasting stands of different mean
diameter with an abrupt boundary. Example: an obvious abrupt
boundary exists within the sampled (fixed-radius) area of a subplot and
demarcates a large diameter stand from a small diameter stand. Use
tree stocking of all live trees that are not overtopped to differentiate
between stand-size classes.
Use crown cover as the surrogate for stocking to determine STAND
SIZE CLASS. View the plot from the top down and examine crown
cover. The stand must have at least 5% of the crown cover in STAND
SIZE CLASSES of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 or any combination of these STAND
SIZE CLASSES; otherwise, the STAND SIZE CLASS is 0 depending on
the characteristics of the stand. If at least 1/3 of crown cover is made
up of STAND SIZE CLASSES = 2, 3, 4, and 5 (combined), the
accessible forested condition will be classified in one of these STAND
SIZE CLASSES based on which of these STAND SIZE CLASSES has
the most crown cover. If less than 1/3 of the crown cover is made up of
STAND SIZE CLASSES = 2, 3, 4, and 5 (combined), classify the
accessible forested condition as a STAND SIZE CLASS = 1, if adequate
cover is present.
If no other condition class defining variables are different between
accessible forest conditions, map on differences in STAND SIZE
CLASS only for the following combinations:
Between Nonstocked (STAND SIZE CLASS = 0) and any stocked forest
land (STAND SIZE CLASS = 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5);
71
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Between STAND SIZE CLASS = 1 and STAND SIZE CLASS = 3, 4, and
5;
Between STAND SIZE CLASS = 2 and STAND SIZE CLASS = 4 and 5;
or
Between STAND SIZE CLASS = 3 and STAND SIZE CLASS = 5.
4.350 REGENERATION STATUS -- Record the code that best
describes the degree of evidence of artificial regeneration that occurred
in the condition.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
0
Natural
Present stand shows no clear evidence of
artificial regeneration. Includes unplanted,
recently cut lands.
1
Artificial
Present stand shows clear evidence of
artificial regeneration.
The instructions in section “Determination of Condition Class” and
“Determining Condition Classes Differing in Condition Status” apply
when delineating, within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions
based on differences in REGENERATION STATUS.
For a forestland condition to be delineated and/or classified as artificially
regenerated, the condition must show distinct evidence of planting or
seeding. If it is difficult to determine whether or not a stand has been
planted or seeded, then use code 0. If no distinct boundary exists within
the sampled (fixed-radius) area on any subplot, then do not recognize
separate conditions. In many regions of the West, trees are not planted
in rows, and planted stands do not differ in physical appearance from
natural conditions. In these cases, there is no need to differentiate
conditions based on stand origin.
4.360 Reserve Status -- Record the code that identifies the reserved
designation for the condition. Reserved land is withdrawn by law(s)
prohibiting the management of land for the production of wood products
(not merely controlling or prohibiting wood harvesting methods). Such
authority is vested in a public agency or department, and supersedes
rights of ownership. The prohibition against management for wood
products cannot be changed through decision of the land manager
(management agency) or through a change in land management
personnel, but rather is permanent in nature. The phrase "withdrawn by
72
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
law" includes as reserved land, parcels of private land with deeds that
specifically prohibit the management of the tract for the production of
wood products.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
0
1
Not reserved
Reserved
4.370 Tree Density -- Record a code to indicate the relative tree density
classification. Base the classification on the number of stems/unit area,
basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the condition which
are not overtopped, compared to any previously defined condition class
TREE DENSITY.
The instructions in “Determination of Condition Class” and “Determining
Condition Classes Differing in Condition Status” apply when delineating,
within accessible forest land, contrasting conditions based on
differences in TREE DENSITY.
Codes 2 and higher are used ONLY when all other attributes used to
delineate separate mapped condition classes are homogenous, i.e.
when a change in density is the ONLY difference within what would
otherwise be treated only as one forest condition. Otherwise, code 1 for
all condition classes. Codes 2 and higher are usually, but not always,
used to demarcate areas that differ from an adjacent area due to forest
disturbance, e.g., a partial harvest or heavy but not total tree mortality
due to a ground fire. Mapping on density should only be done when the
less-dense condition is 50% or less as dense as the denser condition.
Do not distinguish between low stocked stands or stands of sparse and
patchy forest.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
Initial density class
Density class 2 - density different than 1
Density class 3 - density different from 1 and 2
73
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
In order to qualify as a separate condition based on density, there
MUST be a distinct, easily observed change in the density of an area's
tree cover or basal area.
Examples of valid contrasting conditions defined by differences in tree
density are forest land conditions with the same type, origin, stand size,
ownership, and reserved status, but:
•
the eastern half of an otherwise homogeneous, 20 ac stand
has many trees killed by a bark beetle outbreak,
•
one portion of a stand is partially cut over (with 40 sq. ft basal
area per ac) while the other portion is undisturbed (with 100 sq.
ft basal area per ac).
or
4.380 Owner Group -- Record the OWNER GROUP code identifying
the ownership (or the managing Agency for public lands) of the land in
the condition class. Conditions will be mapped based on changes in
OWNER GROUP only; separate conditions due to changes in OWNER
GROUP are recognized only where differences can be clearly identified
on the ground when visiting the plot.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
10
20
30
40
Forest Service
Other Federal
State and Local Government
Private
ANCILLARY (NON-MAPPING) VARIABLES
4.400 Owner Class -- Record the OWNER CLASS code that best
corresponds to the ownership (or the managing Agency for public lands)
of the land in the condition class. Conditions will NOT be mapped
based on changes in owner class. If multiple owner classes within a
group occur on a single condition class, record the owner class closest
to the plot center.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
74
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Owner Classes within Forest Service Lands (Owner Group 10):
11
12
13
National Forest
National Grassland
Other Forest Service
Owner Classes within Other Federal Lands (Owner Group 20)
21
22
23
24
25
National Park Service
Bureau of Land Management
Fish and Wildlife Service
Departments of Defense/Energy
Other Federal
Owner Classes within State and Local Government lands (Owner
Group 30)
31
32
33
State
Local (County, Municipality, etc.)
Other Non Federal Public
Owner Classes within Private lands (Owner Group 40)
41
42
43
44
45
Corporate
Non Governmental Conservation / Natural Resources
Organization
- Examples: Nature Conservancy, National Trust
for Private Lands, Pacific Forest Trust, Boy
Scouts of America, etc.
Unincorporated Partnerships / Associations / Clubs
– Examples: Hunting Clubs that own, not lease
property, recreation associations, 4H, etc.
Native American (Indian)
Individual
4.405 PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS -- Record the code
identifying the status of the owner with regard to being considered
industrial as determined by whether or not they own and operate a
primary wood processing plant. A primary wood processing plant is any
commercial operation that originates the primary processing of wood on
a regular and continuing basis. Examples include: pulp or paper mill,
sawmill, panel board mill, post or pole mill, etc. Cabinet shops, “mom &
pop” home-operated businesses, etc., should not be considered as
industrial plants. If any doubt exists with the determination by the field
crew about the owner’s industrial status due to name, commercial plant
size, type plant, etc., choose code 0 below.
75
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
NOTE: Unit or State headquarters may have to maintain a list of
recognized industrial owners within a State for crews to use
when making these determinations.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes when the
owner group is private (OWNER GROUP 40)
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
0
Land is not owned by industrial owner with a wood
processing plant
1
Land is owned by industrial owner with wood processing
plant
4.410 ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES -- Record the species
code of the predominant tree species for which evidence exists of
artificial regeneration in the stand. This attribute is ancillary; that is,
contrasting condition classes are never delineated based on variation in
this attribute.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes with
evidence of artificial regeneration (REGENERATION STATUS = 1)
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: See Appendix 4
4.420 Stand Age -- Record the average total age, to the nearest year,
of the trees (plurality of all live trees not overtopped) in the predominant
STAND SIZE CLASS of the condition, determined using local
procedures. Record 000 for non-stocked stands.
An estimate of STAND AGE is required for every forest land
condition class defined on a plot. Stand age is usually highly
correlated with stand size and should reflect the average age of
all trees that are not overtopped. Unlike the procedure for Site
tree age, estimates of stand age should estimate the time of
tree establishment (e.g., not age at the point of diameter
measurement). Note: For planted stands, estimate age based
on the year the stand was planted (e.g., do not add in the age
of the planting stock).
To estimate STAND AGE, select two or three dominant or
codominant trees from the overstory. If the overstory covers a
wide range of tree sizes and species, try to select the trees
accordingly, but it is not necessary to core additional trees in
such stands. The variance associated with mean stand age
increases with stand heterogeneity, and additional cores are
76
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
not likely to improve the estimate. Core each tree at the point
of diameter measurement and count the rings between the
outside edge and the core to the pith. Add in the number of
years that passed from germination until the tree reached the
point of core extraction to determine the total age of the tree.
Unless more specific information is provided at training or by
the unit, add 5 years to all eastern species, 5 years to western
hardwoods, and 10 years to western softwoods. Assign a
weight to each core by visually estimating the percentage of
total overstory trees it represents. Make sure the weights from
all cores add up to 1.0, compute the weighted average age,
and record. For example, if three trees aged 34, 62, and 59
years represent 25 percent, 60 percent, and 15 percent of the
overstory, respectively, the weighted stand age should be:
(34 x 0.25) + (62 x 0.60) + (59 x 0.15) = 55 years.
In some cases, it may be possible to avoid coring trees to
determine age. If a stand has not been seriously disturbed
since the previous survey, simply add the number of years
since the previous inventory to the previous STAND AGE. In
other situations, cores collected from site trees can be used to
estimate STAND AGE.
If a condition class is nonstocked, assign a STAND AGE of
000.
If all of the trees in a condition class are of a species that, by
regional standards, cannot be bored for age (e.g., mountain
mahogany, tupelo) record 998. This code should be used in
these cases only.
If tree cores are not counted in the field, but are collected and sent to
the office for the counting of rings, record 999.
When collected: All accessible forest land condition classes
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10%, at least 95% of the time
Values: 000 to 997, 998, 999
4.431 Disturbance 1 -- Record the code corresponding to the presence
of the following disturbances. Disturbance can connote positive or
negative effects. The area affected by any natural or human-caused
disturbance must be at least 1.0 ac in size. Record up to three different
disturbances per condition class from most important to least important
as best as can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is,
contrasting conditions are never delineated based on variation in this
attribute.
77
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
For initial forest plot establishment (initial grid activation or newly
forested plots), the disturbance must be within the last 5 years. For
remeasured plots recognize only those disturbances that have occurred
since the previous inventory.
The disturbance codes below require "significant threshold" damage,
which implies mortality and/or damage to 25 percent of individual trees
in the condition class.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
Code
Definition
00
None - no observable disturbance
10
Insects
20
Disease
30
31
32
33
34
Weather other than the following:
ice
wind (includes hurricane, tornado)
flooding (weather-induced)
drought
41
42
Fire (from crown and ground fire, either prescribed or
natural)
ground fire
crown fire
40
50
Domestic animal/livestock (includes grazing)
60
61
62
63
Wild animal other than the following:
beaver (includes flooding caused by beaver)
porcupine
deer/ungulate
70
Human - Any significant threshold human-caused damage
not described in the DISTURBANCE codes listed above or
the TREATMENT codes listed below.
80
Other natural - Any significant threshold natural damage,
not described in the DISTURBANCE codes listed above.
78
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.432 DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 -- Record the year in which
DISTURBANCE 1 occurred. If the disturbance occurs continuously over
a period of time, record 9999.
When collected: When DISTURBANCE 1 > 00
Field width: 4 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: Since the previous plot visit or the past 5 years for plots visited
for the first time
4.433 DISTURBANCE 2 -- If a stand has experienced more than one
disturbance, record the second disturbance here. See DISTURBANCE
1 for coding instructions.
4.434 DISTURBANCE YEAR 2 -- Record the year in which
DISTURBANCE 2 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding
instructions.
4.435 DISTURBANCE 3 -- If a stand has experienced more than two
disturbances, record the third disturbance here. See DISTURBANCE 1
for coding instructions.
4.436 DISTURBANCE YEAR 3 -- Record the year in which
DISTURBANCE 3 occurred. See DISTURBANCE YEAR 1 for coding
instructions.
4.491 TREATMENT 1 -- Record the code corresponding to the
presence of one of the following treatments since the last inventory
cycle or within the past 5 years. The area affected by any treatment
must be at least 1.0 ac in size. Record up to three different treatments
per condition class from most important to least important as best as
can be determined. This attribute is ancillary; that is, contrasting
conditions are never delineated based on variation in this attribute.
For initial forest plot establishment (initial grid activation or newly
forested plots), the treatment must be within the last 5 years. For
remeasured plots recognize only those treatments that have occurred
since the previous inventory.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
79
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Definition
00
None - No observable treatment.
10
Cutting - The removal of one or more trees from a stand.
20
Site preparation - Clearing, slash burning, chopping, disking,
bedding, or other practices clearly intended to prepare a site for
either natural or artificial regeneration.
30
Artificial regeneration - Planting or direct seeding has resulted
in a stand at least 50% stocked with live trees of any size.
40
Natural regeneration - Growth of existing trees and/or natural
seeding has resulted in a stand at least 50% stocked with live
trees of any size.
50
Other silvicultural treatment - The use of fertilizers, herbicides,
girdling, pruning or other activities (not already listed above)
designed to improve the commercial value of the residual
stand.
4.492 TREATMENT YEAR 1 -- Record the year in which TREATMENT
1 occurred.
When collected: When TREATMENT 1 > 00
Field width: 4 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: Since the previous plot visit or the past 5 years for plots visited
for the first time
4.493 TREATMENT 2 -- If a stand has experienced more than one
treatment, record the second treatment here. See TREATMENT 1 for
coding instructions, code 00 if none.
4.494 TREATMENT YEAR 2 -- Record the year in which TREATMENT
2 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.
4.495 TREATMENT 3 -- If a stand has experienced more than two
treatments, record the third treatment here. See TREATMENT 1 for
coding instructions, code 00 if none.
4.496 TREATMENT YEAR 3 -- Record the year in which TREATMENT
3 occurred. See TREATMENT YEAR 1 for coding instructions.
80
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.440 PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS -- Record the code that best describes
the PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS of the condition; land form, topographic
position, and soil generally determine physiographic class. As a rule of
thumb, look over the annular plot area to determine physiographic class,
but always use your best judgment when assessing any condition level
variables.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, at least 80% of the time
Values:
Xeric
Sites that are normally low or deficient in moisture available
to support vigorous tree growth. These areas may receive
adequate precipitation, but experience a rapid loss of
available moisture due to runoff, percolation, evaporation,
etc.
11
Dry Tops - Ridge tops with thin rock outcrops and
considerable exposure to sun and wind.
12
Dry Slopes - Slopes with thin rock outcrops and considerable
exposure to sun and wind. Includes most steep slopes with
a southern or western exposure.
13
Deep Sands - Sites with a deep, sandy surface subject to
rapid loss of moisture following precipitation.
Typical
examples include sand hills, sites along the beach and
shores of lakes and streams, and many deserts.
19
Other Xeric
above.
Mesic
Sites that have moderate but adequate moisture available to
support vigorous tree growth except for periods of extended
drought. These sites may be subjected to occasional
flooding during periods of heavy or extended precipitation.
21
Flatwoods - Flat or fairly level sites outside flood plains.
Excludes deep sands and wet, swampy sites.
22
Rolling Uplands - Hills and gently rolling, undulating terrain
and associated small streams. Excludes deep sands, all
hydric sites, and streams with associated flood plains.
23
Moist Slopes and Coves - Moist slopes and coves with
relatively deep, fertile soils. Often these sites have a
- All dry physiographic sites not described
81
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
northern or eastern exposure and are partially shielded from
wind and sun. Includes moist mountaintops and saddles.
24
Narrow Flood plains/Bottomlands - Flood plains and
bottomlands less than 1 mile in width along rivers and
streams. These sites are normally well drained but are
subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or
extended precipitation.
Includes associated levees,
benches, and terraces within a 1/4-mile limit. Excludes
swamps, sloughs, and bogs.
25
Broad Flood plains/Bottomlands - Flood plains and
bottomlands 1 mile or wider in width along rivers and
streams. These sites are normally well drained but are
subjected to occasional flooding during periods of heavy or
extended precipitation.
Includes associated levees,
benches, and terraces within a 1-mile limit. Excludes
swamps, sloughs, and bogs with year-round water problems
within the 1-mile limit.
29
Other Mesic - All moderately moist physiographic sites not
described above.
Hydric
Sites that generally have a year-round abundance or overabundance of moisture. Hydric sites are very wet sites
where excess water seriously limits both growth and species
occurrence.
31
Swamps / Bogs - Low, wet, flat forested areas usually quite
extensive that are flooded for long periods of time except
during periods of extreme drought. Excludes cypress ponds
and small drains.
32
Small Drains - Narrow, stream-like, wet strands of forest land
often without a well-defined stream channel. These areas
are poorly drained or flooded throughout most of the year
and drain the adjacent higher ground.
33
Bays and wet pocosins - Low, wet, boggy sites characterized
by peaty or organic soils. May be somewhat dry during
periods of extended drought. Examples include sites in the
Lake States with lowland swamp conifers or the Carolina
bays in the southeast US.
34
Beaver ponds
35
Cypress ponds
82
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
39
Other hydric - All other hydric physiographic sites.
4.450 Timber Management Class -- Timber management class
identifies the physical opportunity to improve stand conditions through
application of management practices. Assign a timber management
class to all forested plots and condition classes (timberland, urban forest
land, productive-reserved, and unproductive forest land uses). This
class should be the most appropriate one for the stand. The stand is
that group of trees, represented by the plot, or condition class, of the
same forest type and generally the same size of timber.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, at least 80% of the time
Values:
01 Regeneration without Site Preparation:
The area is
characterized by the absence of a manageable stand because of
inadequate stocking of growing stock trees. Growth will be
considerably below potential for the site if the area is left alone.
Prospects are not good for natural regeneration.
Artificial
regeneration will require little or no site preparation.
02 Regeneration with Site Preparation: The area is characterized
by the absence of a manageable stand because of inadequate
stocking of growing stock. Growth will be considerably below
potential for the site if the area is left alone. Natural or artificial
regeneration will require site preparation.
03 Stand Conversion: The area is characterized by stands of
undesirable, chronically diseased, or off-site species. Growth will
be considerably below potential for the site if the area is left alone.
The best prospect is for conversion to a different type or species.
04 Thinning Seedlings or Saplings: The stand is characterized by a
dense stocking of growing stock. Stagnation appears likely if left
alone. Stocking must be reduced to help crop trees attain
dominance.
05 Thinning Poletimber: The stand is characterized by a dense
stocking of growing stock. Stocking must be reduced to prevent
stagnation or to confine growth to fewer, high quality crop trees.
06 Other Stocking Control: The stand is characterized by an
adequate stocking of seedlings, saplings, and/or poletimber growing
stock, mixed with competing vegetation either overtopping or
otherwise inhibiting the development of crop trees. The undesirable
material must be removed to release overtopped trees, prevent
83
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
stagnation, or to improve composition, form, or growth of the
residual stand.
07 Other Intermediate Treatments: The stand would benefit from
other special treatments, such as fertilization to improve the growth
potential of the site, or pruning to improve the quality of the
individual crop trees.
08 Clear cut Harvest: The area is characterized by a mature or over
mature sawtimber stand of sufficient volume to justify a commercial
harvest. The best prospect is to harvest the stand and regenerate.
09 Partial Cut Harvest: The stand is characterized by poletimber or
sawtimber sized trees with sufficient merchantable volume for a
commercial harvest, which will achieve intermediate stand
treatment needs or prepare the stand for natural regeneration. The
stand is of a favored species composition, and may be even or
uneven aged. Included are such treatments as commercial thinning,
seed tree or shelterwood regeneration, and the selection system to
maintain an uneven age stand.
10 Salvage Harvest:
The stand is characterized by excessive
damage to merchantable timber due to fire, insects, disease, wind,
ice, or other destructive agents. The best prospect is for removal of
damaged or threatened material.
11 No Treatment: The stand is characterized by an adequate stock of
growing stock trees in reasonably good condition.
4.451 PAST NONFOREST / INACCESSIBLE LAND USE -- Record and
map on this attribute ONLY when a condition classified at last inventory
as nonforest is now accessible forest land. The area that has changed
is a new, separate condition class. Instructions in “Determination of
Condition Class” and “Determining Condition Classes Differing in
Condition Status” apply. When classifying these cases, select the
classification that, within the sampled area, indicates what the majority
of this changed area was at the time of previous inventory.
Example: During the previous inventory, subplot 2 was classified as
entirely nonforest land. The other subplots sampled accessible forest
land. At that time, 55 percent of the area on subplot 2 was pasture, and
45 percent was cropland. (Note: these two nonforest classes were not
actually mapped, but rather the entire subplot represented a condition
class that was simply classified as nonforest land.)
At revisit, 60 percent of subplot 2, including all that was pasture within
the subplot, is found planted to pines and is now forestland. The other
subplots remained forestland. The portion of subplot 2 that changed
from nonforest to forest is mapped and recorded as a new condition
84
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
class. This "new" forest land should not be considered part of the
original forest land condition class(es) sampled on the other subplots.
Because it is a condition that changed from nonforest to forest, the
attribute "Past nonforest land use" must be coded; the appropriate
classification is pasture, the majority nonforest use -- at last inventory -within the mapped portion of this new condition class.
Sampled area that shifts from access-denied, hazardous, outside the
sample, or other uses to accessible forest land are treated in like
manner. Codes 40, 91, 92, 93, and 94 apply.
When collected: Previous CONDITION STATUS not equal to 1, current
CONDITION STATUS = 1 (Note: This field is not
required until the next full cycle.)
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
10
Agricultural land - Land managed for crops, pasture, or
other agricultural use. The area must be at least 1.0 ac in
size and 120.0 ft wide. Use the 10 code only for cases not
better described by one of the following:
11
12
13
14
15
Cropland
Pasture (improved through cultural practices)
Idle farmland
Orchard
Christmas tree plantation
20
Rangeland - Land primarily composed of grasses, forbs, or
shrubs.
This includes lands vegetated naturally or
artificially to provide a plant cover managed like native
vegetation and does not meet the definition of pasture.
The area must be at least 1.0 ac in size and 120.0 ft wide.
30
Developed - Land used primarily by humans for purposes
other than forestry or agriculture. Use the 30 code only for
land not better described by one of the following:
31
32
33
40
Cultural:
business, residential, and other
places of intense human activity.
Rights-of-way: improved roads, railway, power
lines, and maintained canals
Recreation: parks, skiing, golf courses
Other - Land parcels greater than 1.0 ac in size and
greater than 120.0 ft wide, that do not fall into one of the
uses described above. Examples include undeveloped
85
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
beaches, barren land (rock, sand), noncensus water,
marshes, bogs, ice, and snow.
90
Not sampled - Land areas that are not sampled. Use the
90 code only for land not better described by one of the
following:
91
92
93
94
Census water: meets definition of Census
water.
Denied access: access denied by the owner.
Hazardous: land could not be safely accessed
by crews.
Not in the sample: area outside the population
of interest, e.g., land in Mexico or Canada.
4.452 PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE -- Record this attribute
when area sampled and classified at last inventory as accessible forest
land is now nonforest land. The area that has changed is a new,
separate condition class. It should not be considered part of any
nonforest land condition class(es) sampled during the previous inventory
that may still be present. Instructions in “Determination of Condition
Class” and “Determining Condition Classes Differing in Condition
Status” apply. When classifying these cases, select the classification
that, within sampled area, indicates what the majority of this changed
area is now if more than one nonforest classes are present. Use the
codes and classifications listed in 4.451; note that the 90 codes will not
apply.
(CORE OPTIONAL) - Record the PRESENT NONFOREST LAND USE
for all nonforest conditions (CONDITION STATUS 2), regardless of past
condition. Use the codes and classifications listed in 4.451.
When collected: CORE: SAMPLE KIND = 6, 7, and 8, Previous
CONDITION STATUS = 1, current CONDITION
STATUS not equal to 1 (Note: This field is not
required until the next full cycle.)
CORE OPTIONAL: current CONDITION STATUS = 2
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: Same as 4.451
86
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.453 NONFOREST YEAR -- Record the estimated year that a
previously accessible forestland condition class was converted to a
nonforest condition. This variable will be used to apportion tree growth
on trees any trees that were included in the condition when it was
forestland. Record the year in which the conversion took place. In most
cases, all trees in a given condition class will be assigned the same
nonforest year. If it can be determined that a tree died before the land
was converted to a nonforest use, mortality year is also required.
When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 6, 7 and 8, Previous CONDITION
STATUS = 1, current CONDITION STATUS not equal
to 1 (Note: This field is not required until the next
full cycle.)
Field width: 4 digits
MQO: +/- 1 year, 70% of the time for remeasurement cycles of 5 years;
+/- 2 years, 70% of the time for remeasurement cycles of > 5
years
Values: 1999 or higher
4.460 STAND HISTORY -- Based upon conditions within the condition
class, record the code that best describes the harvesting activities since
the last inventory.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 80% of the time
Values:
0
no evidence of harvesting
1
Clearcut: commercial or noncommercial clearcutting in blocks
or patches
2
Partial cut: may include any harvesting situation where
scattered individual trees or very small groups of trees were
cut.
Selection, diameter limit cutting, seed tree and
shelterwood cuts should also be included.
3
Strip cut: a harvesting practice of cutting alternating strips of
trees. A common example is to cut strips the width of a feller /
buncher and leave similar strips uncut.
87
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.465 STAND STRUCTURE -- Record the code describing the basic
form of the trees in the condition. This attribute is ancillary; that is,
contrasting conditions are never delineated based on variation in this
attribute.
Record only on condition classes that are accessible
forestland.
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes – MAINE
only
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 80% of the time
Values:
Code
Description
1
Single-storied: stands characterized by an even canopy
of uniform height with close competition between trees.
The smaller trees are usually members of the stand that
were stressed or overtopped and have fallen behind their
associates. Regeneration and/or tall relics from a previous
stand may be present. Most of the trees in the condition
are within the height class of the average stand height.
2
Two-storied: stands composed of two relatively even but
distinct canopy layers, such as a mature overstory with an
understory sapling layer, possibly from seed tree and
shelterwood operations, or an overstory of tall conifers with
an understory of low hardwoods. Neither canopy is
necessarily continuous or closed, but both canopy levels
tend to be uniformly distributed across the stand. Each
canopy level must cover at least 25 percent of the
condition.
3
Multi-storied:
stands generally containing trees from
every size group on a continuum from seedlings to mature
trees and are characterized by a broken or uneven canopy
layer. Usually the largest number of trees is in the smaller
diameter classes. Consider any stand with three or more
structural layers as multi-storied if each of the three or
more layers covers at least percent of the condition.
4
Mosaic: stands contain at least two distinct size classes
each of which covers at least 25 percent of the condition;
however, these classes are not uniformly distributed but
are grouped in small repeating aggregations, or occur in
stringers less than 120.0 ft. (36.6 m.) wide, throughout the
stand. Each size class aggregation is too small to be
recognized and mapped as an individual stand; the
aggregations may or may not be single-storied.
88
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
5
Nonstocked: Less than 10-percent tree stocking present,
or less than 5-percent cover in several western woodland
types.
4.470 STOCKING CLASS -- Refer to the Relative Stocking chart in
Appendix 6 to determine the level of stocking and then enter the
appropriate code from the following list:
When collected: All accessible forestland condition classes
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 80% of the time
Values:
1
Nonstocked
∴ 10 % stocking
2
Poorly stocked
∞10 %, but ∴ 35 % stocking
3
Moderately stocked
∞ 35 %, but ∴ 60 % stocking
4
Well stocked
∞ 60 %, but
5
Over stocked
ν 100 % stocking
6
All subplots in the same forested condition class.
100 % stocking
BOUNDARY REFERENCES
Boundary reference data are used to remeasure plots and to compute
the area for the condition classes sampled on a plot. Record all
boundaries between condition classes that occur within the sampled
(fixed-radius) area on subplots and microplots (and optionally annular
plots).
Boundaries outside sampled (fixed-radius) areas are not
referenced.
In addition to the recording procedures described herein, sketch maps
of condition class boundaries onto the pre-printed plot diagrams on field
tally sheets.
REFERENCE PROCEDURE
Reference, within the sampled area on each microplot, subplot, and
annular plot, the approximate boundary of each condition class that
differs from the condition class at a subplot center. Trees selected on
these fixed-radius plots are assigned to the actual condition in which
they lie regardless of the recorded approximate boundary.
Boundary referencing is done by recording azimuths and distances from
subplot center to the reference points (Figures 7 and 8). Each boundary
is marked by a maximum of three points - two where the boundary
intersects the subplot circumference, and one "corner" point between
89
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
the two end points, if necessary. Only the corner point requires a
distance, since the distance from the center to the circumference is
always equal to the fixed plot radius.
Figure 7. How to measure a straight boundary on
a microplot, subplot, or annular plot.
Figure 8. How to measure a boundary with a corner
on a subplot or annular plot.
90
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Microplot boundaries are referenced to the microplot center, and annular
plot boundaries are referenced to the subplot center in the same
manner described for subplots. Note that the larger the plot, the greater
likelihood of a need for a boundary corner to record boundaries that are
not straight lines.
Refer to Sections “Determination of Condition Class” and “Determining
Condition Classes Differing in Condition Status” for general mapping
guidelines. The following additional rules apply when referencing a
boundary within a subplot, microplot, or annular plot:
1.
When a boundary between accessible forestland and nonforest
land or between two contrasting accessible forest land
condition classes is clearly marked, use that feature to define
the boundary. Examples of clear demarcation are a fence line,
plowed field edge, sharp ridgeline, and water's edge along a
stream course, ditch, or canal.
2.
When a boundary between forest land and nonforest land is
not clearly marked by an obvious feature, the boundary should
follow the nonforest side of the stems of the trees at the forest
edge.
3.
When a boundary between two contrasting forest land
condition classes is not clearly marked, map along the stems of
the contrasting condition. When the boundary between two
contrasting forest land condition classes is separated by a
narrow linear inclusion (creek, fire line, narrow meadow,
unimproved road), establish the boundary at the far edge,
relative to subplot center, of the inclusion.
4.
When a plot is remeasured, the crew will examine the
boundaries referenced at last inventory. If no change has
occurred, the current crew will retain the boundary data that
were recorded at last inventory. If a boundary has changed, or
a new boundary is present, or the previous crew made an
obvious error, record new or updated boundary data. Delete
boundaries that are no longer distinct.
5.
Although individual MQOs are specified for the azimuths and
distances, in practice a crew will be considered ‘correct’ when
the difference in areas as mapped by the original crew and by
the QA crew is less than 10% of the subplot or microplot area.
This allows for slight variations in azimuths or distances due to
the approximate nature of our mapping procedures.
91
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
BOUNDARY DATA
Record the appropriate values for each boundary mapped on the
subplot, microplot, or annular plot as follows:
4.100 SUBPLOT NUMBER -- Record the code corresponding to the
number of the subplot.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
Center subplot
North subplot
Southeast subplot
Southwest subplot
4.200 PLOT TYPE -- Record the code to specify whether the boundary
data are for a subplot, microplot, or annular plot.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
Subplot boundary
Microplot boundary
Annular plot boundary (coded only when annular plots
are taken)
4.211 BOUNDARY CHANGE – Remeasurement locations only. Record
the appropriate code to indicate the relationship between previously
recorded and current boundary information.
When collected: SAMPLE KIND = 6, 7 and 8, All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
0
No change - boundary is the same as indicated on plot map by a
previous crew.
1
New boundary or boundary data has been changed to reflect an
actual on-the-ground physical change resulting in a difference
from the boundaries recorded.
92
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
2
Boundary has been changed to correct an error from previous
crew.
3
Boundary has been changed to reflect a change in variable
definition.
4.212 CONTRASTING CONDITION -- Record the CONDITION CLASS
NUMBER of the condition class that contrasts with the condition class
located at the subplot center (for boundaries on the subplot or annular
plot) or at the microplot center (for boundaries on the microplot), e.g.,
the condition class present on the other side of the boundary line.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
4.213 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER -- Record the condition class
number of the condition at subplot center.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
4.214 LEFT AZIMUTH -- Record the azimuth from the subplot,
microplot, or annular plot center to the farthest left point (facing the
contrasting condition class) where the boundary intersects the subplot,
microplot, or annular plot circumference.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10 degrees, at least 90% of the time
Values: 001 to 360
4.215 CORNER AZIMUTH -- Record the azimuth from the subplot,
microplot, or annular plot center to a corner or curve in a boundary. If a
boundary is best described by a straight line between the two
circumference points, then record 000 for CORNER AZIMUTH
(000=none).
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10 degrees, at least 90% of the time
Values: 000 to 360
93
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.216 CORNER DISTANCE -- Record the horizontal distance, to the
nearest 1 ft, from the subplot, microplot, or annular plot center to a
boundary corner point.
When collected: All boundaries when CORNER AZIMUTH > 000
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: +/- 1 ft, at least 90% of the time
Values:
Microplot
1 to 7 ft
Subplot
1 to 24 ft
Annular plot
1 to 59 ft
4.217 RIGHT AZIMUTH -- Record the azimuth from subplot, microplot,
or annular plot center to the farthest right point (facing the contrasting
condition) where the boundary intersects the subplot, microplot, or
annular plot circumference.
When collected: All boundaries
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10 degrees, at least 90% of the time
Values: 001 to 360
94
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
5.000 SEEDLING DATA
Stocking and regeneration information are obtained by counting
seedlings within the 6.8 ft radius microplot located 90 degrees and 12.0
ft from each subplot center within each of the four subplots. Conifer
seedlings must be at least 6.0 inches above the ground and less than
1.0 in at DBH in order to qualify for tallying. Hardwood seedlings must
be at least 12.0 inches above the ground and less than 1.0 in at DBH in
order to qualify for tallying. Seedlings are counted in groups by species
and condition class, up to 5 individuals per species. Counts beyond 5
are coded as 6. Species are coded in order from most abundant to
least abundant when NUMBER OF STEMS is coded as 6. Only count
seedlings occurring in accessible forestland condition classes.
5.100 SUBPLOT NUMBER -- Record the code corresponding to the
number of the subplot.
When collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
Center subplot
North subplot
Southeast subplot
Southwest subplot
5.110 SPECIES -- Record the appropriate SPECIES code from the list
in Appendix 4. If you encounter a species not listed in Appendix 4 and
are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree, consult your Field
Supervisor. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the
tree, but bring branch samples, foliage, cones, flowers, bark, etc. to your
supervisor for identification. If possible, collect samples outside the
subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the
SPECIES code later. Use the generic SPECIES code only when you
encounter a tree where you know tree species but the species is not on
the species list.
When Collected: All counts of seedlings
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors for genus at least 90% of the time, no errors for
species at least 85% of the time
Values: See Appendix 4
95
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
5.120 DBH -- Record 001 for all seedlings that are tallied.
When Collected: All counts of seedlings
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Value: 001
5.140 REPRODUCTION NUMBER -- Assign a three-digit reproduction
number for each item, or line, of seedlings that is tallied. Regeneration
numbers begin at 001 on each subplot and increase sequentially in
order as each line of data is recorded.
When Collected: All counts of seedlings
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 001 to 099
5.200 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER -- On a plot, assign and record a
unique identifying number for each condition class. At the time of the
plot establishment, the condition class at plot center (the center of
subplot 1) is designated condition class 1. Other condition classes are
assigned numbers sequentially at the time each condition class is
delineated. On a plot, each sampled condition class must have a
unique number that can change at remeasurement to reflect new
conditions on the plot.
When collected: All counts of seedlings
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
5.300 NUMBER OF STEMS --Record the number of seedlings of each
species, by condition class. Count up to 5 individuals by species; code
6 if there are more than 5 individuals of any given species in any given
condition class. Code species in order from most abundant to least
abundant when NUMBER OF STEMS is coded as 6.
When Collected: Each accessible forest land condition class on each
microplot
Field width: 2 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 95% of the time
Values:
01 to 05
06
Exact count
More than 5 individuals by species by condition
class.
96
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
SHRUB, DWARF SHRUB AND VINE DATA FOR THE MAINE
INVENTORY
Additional vegetation information is obtained by counting shrubs, dwarf
shrubs and vines within a 3.7 ft radius milacre plot located 90 degrees
and 12.0 ft from each subplot center within each of the four subplots.
Shrubs are counted in groups by species and condition class, up to 99
individuals per species. Counts beyond 99 are coded as 99.
Dwarf shrubs and vines are tallied by occurrence and condition class.
Individual counts of specimens are not necessary for these life forms.
Only count shrubs, dwarf shrubs and vines occurring in accessible
forestland condition classes.
5.110 SPECIES -- Record the appropriate SPECIES code from the list
in Appendix 4. If you encounter a species not listed in Appendix 4 and
are not sure if it should be tallied, consult your Field Supervisor. If the
species cannot be determined in the field, tally the shrub, dwarf shrub or
vine, but bring branch samples, foliage, cones, flowers, bark, etc. to your
supervisor for identification. If possible, collect samples outside the
subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the
SPECIES code later. Use the generic SPECIES code only when you
encounter a shrub etc. where you know the species but the species is
not on the species list.
When Collected: All counts of shrubs, dwarf shrubs and vines -- Maine
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors for genus at least 90% of the time, no errors for
species at least 85% of the time
Values: See Appendix 4
5.100 SUBPLOT NUMBER -- Record the code corresponding to the
number of the subplot.
When collected: All subplots -- Maine
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
Center subplot
North subplot
Southeast subplot
Southwest subplot
97
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
5.140 REPRODUCTION NUMBER -- Assign a three-digit reproduction
number for each item, or line, of shrubs, etc. that is tallied.
Regeneration numbers begin at 001 on each subplot and increase
sequentially in order as each line of data is recorded.
When Collected: All counts of shrubs, dwarf shrubs and vines – Maine
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 001 to 099
5.200 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER -- On a plot, assign and record a
unique identifying number for each condition class. At the time of the
plot establishment, the condition class at plot center (the center of
subplot 1) is designated condition class 1. Other condition classes are
assigned numbers sequentially at the time each condition class is
delineated. On a plot, each sampled condition class must have a
unique number that can change at remeasurement to reflect new
conditions on the plot.
When collected: All counts of shrubs, dwarf shrubs and vines – Maine
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
5.300 NUMBER OF STEMS --Record the number of shrubs of each
species, by condition class. Count up to 99 individuals by species.
When Collected: Each accessible forest land condition class on each
milacre plot -- Maine
Field width: 2 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 95% of the time
Values: 1 to 99
98
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.000 TREE AND SAPLING DATA
Trees at least 5.0 inches in diameter are sampled within the subplot.
‘Tally trees’ are defined as all live and dead trees in accessible
forestland condition classes encountered on the subplot the first time a
subplot is established, and all trees that grow into a subplot thereafter.
These data yield information on tree growth, mortality, removals; coarse
woody debris; wildlife habitats; forest structure and composition;
biomass; and carbon sequestration.
Additional dead and down tree data is collected in the Northeast.
However, do not tally dead trees that have been lying on the ground for
so long that advanced decay is present.
Trees with a diameter at least 1.0 in but less than 5.0 in, termed
saplings, are sampled within the microplot (see Seedling Data for
locations of microplots). ‘Tally saplings’ are defined as all live saplings
in accessible forest land condition classes encountered the first time a
microplot is established, and all saplings that grow into each microplot
thereafter are included until they grow to 5.0 in or larger, at which time
they are tallied on the 24.0 ft subplot and referenced (new azimuth and
distance taken) to the subplot center.
Additional sapling data is collected in Maine. The 5th microplot is
located 270 degrees and 12 feet from the center subplot. Minimal data
is collected on these saplings. The required sapling data are subplot
number, tree number, species, DBH, condition class number, and actual
length.
Trees are alive if they have any living parts (leaves, buds, cambium) at
or above the point of diameter measurement, either diameter at breast
height (DBH). Trees that have been temporarily defoliated are still alive.
Once tallied, dead trees over 5.0 in diameter are tracked until signs of
advanced decay become present. Working around dead trees is a
safety hazard - crews should exercise extreme caution! Trees that
are deemed unsafe to measure should be noted as such and left
alone.
To qualify as a standing dead tally tree, dead trees must be standing
(LEAN ANGLE = 0 or 1) with no part of the bole touching the ground, at
least 4.5 ft tall and be at least 5.0 inches in diameter. Broken portions of
trees that are completely separated from their base are not treated as
separate trees.
99
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Whether live or dead, standing trees do not have to be self-supported.
They may be supported by other trees.
High stumps (trees that have been cut) do not qualify as standing
dead trees.
Begin tallying trees at an azimuth of 001 degrees from subplot center
and continue clockwise around the subplot. Repeat this sequence for
trees on the microplot.
6.100 SUBPLOT NUMBER -- Record the subplot number where the
tree occurs.
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH and all dead tally trees
> 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
5
Center subplot
North subplot
Southeast subplot
Southwest subplot
Additional Maine sapling microplot
6.105 TREE RECORD NUMBER -- Record a code to uniquely and
permanently identify each tree on a given subplot. The TREE RECORD
NUMBERS must be unique within a subplot – being unique is more
important than being sequential. In general, work clockwise from
azimuth 001 to 360, and work outwards from subplot center to subplot
edge. On remeasured plots, use the tree number assigned at the
previous visit. Saplings tallied on microplots will retain their initially
assigned tree number if they grow to tree size. Missed trees will be
assigned the next available tree number. DO NOT renumber all plot
trees in order to assign a more “correct” tree number to a missed tree.
Numbers assigned to trees that are subsequently found to be extra will
be dropped and not reused.
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH and all dead tally trees
> 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 001 to 999
100
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.100 SPECIES -- Record the appropriate SPECIES code from the list
in Appendix 4. If you encounter a species not listed in Appendix 4 and
are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree, consult your Field
Supervisor. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the
tree, but bring branch samples, foliage, cones, flowers, bark, etc. to your
supervisor for identification. If possible, collect samples outside the
subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the
SPECIES code later. Use the generic SPECIES code only when you
encounter a tree where you know tree species but the species is not on
the species list.
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH and all dead tally trees
> 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors for genus 100% of the time, no errors for species at
least 95% of the time
Values: See Appendix 4
6.120 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE -- Record the measured
HORIZONTAL DISTANCE, to the nearest 0.1 ft, from the subplot center
(for trees > 5.0 in DBH) or microplot center (for trees ≥ 1.0 in and < 5.0
in DBH) to the pith of the tree at the base.
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH and all dead tally trees
> 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
MQO: Microplot: +/- 0.2 ft, at least 90% of the time
Subplot: +/- 1.0 ft, at least 90% of the time
Values: Microplot: 00.1 to 6.8
Subplot: 00.1 to 24.0
Measure the horizontal distance for down and windthrown trees to the
spot where the center of the tree would have been if the tree were still
standing; i.e., measure the distance to the center of the stump, or
ground cavity.
distance of
fallen tree
center stake
center of stump hole
101
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Occasionally, the slope at a plot will be too great to measure the
horizontal distance directly. When this happens, the slope distance and
the percent slope (measured with a clinometer) from subplot center to
the tree will be needed to calculate the horizontal distance. The formula
for calculating the horizontal distance is as follows:
measured slope
distance to tree
100-ft slope distance
horizontal
distance to tree
100-ft horizontal distance
=
For example, a tree has a slope distance of 23.9 feet and the slope is 48
%. Using the Slope Correction table in Appendix 10 you find that the
correction for 100 feet with 48 % slope is 10.9 feet.
All that’s left is to solve the equation:
23.9’
110.9’
=
horizontal distance to tree
100’
Solve for the horizontal distance, HD = 21.6 feet.
6.130 AZIMUTH -- Record the AZIMUTH from the subplot center (for
trees > 5.0 in DBH) or the microplot center (for trees ≥ 1.0 in and < 5.0
in DBH), sight the center of the base of each tree with a compass.
Record AZIMUTH to the nearest degree. Use 360 for north.
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH and all dead tally trees
> 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10 degrees, at least 90% of the time
Values: 001 to 360
6.140 TREE HISTORY -- A tree history code describes the status of a
tree during this inventory as compared to its status during the previous
inventory. This is the key variable used to differentiate components of
change between inventories. Complete this item for all trees 5.0 in.
DBH, or greater, tallied on subplot 1 of remeasured plots.
Assign a tree history code for:
•
Every tree that was tallied as a live tree at the last inventory if it had
a DBH of 5.0 inches or greater.
•
Every live tree with current DBH of 5.0 inches or greater that is
being tallied for the first time during this inventory. (This includes
trees previously tallied as saplings that have grown to 5.0 inches
DBH, or more, and are being tallied as growing stock for the first
time.)
102
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
•
Standing dead trees that were alive, but not large enough (5.0
inches DBH) to be tallied at the last survey, but which grew to 5.0
inches DBH or greater and died since the last inventory. These are
dead ingrowth.
•
Standing snags that were dead at the last occasion but are still
standing. Do not mistake snags for dead ingrowth. Cedar is an
example of a tree that can die and remain standing for a number of
years.
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH on plots that
are being remeasured
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: no error, 100% of the time
Values:
Code
Survivors -- Live, previously measured trees, or trees that
were missed trees at the last occasion
10
same live tree -- was in before, is in now
12
tree was missed at last survey -- should have been tallied but
wasn't, is now tallied
15*
multiple stemmed tree -- the product of two (possibly more)
previously measured trees of the same species that had
grown together and were treated as one tree (used only in
conjunction with code 16)
16*
multiple stemmed tree – one of two, or more, trees of the
same species that were treated as one tree, but are now
tallied as individuals (used only in conjunction with code 15)
17*
multiple forked tree – the product of two (possibly more) stems
that forked above 4.5 ft and were treated as one tree (used
only in conjunction with code 18)
18*
multiple forked tree – one of two, or more, stems that the
diameter measurement is now taken 3.5 ft above the point of
pith separation (used only in conjunction with code 17)
19
trees that are alive, but were incorrectly tallied as dead at the
last occasion. Limited to trees with a previous tree class of 5
or 6.
* Histories 15, 16, 17, and 18 may include dead trees.
103
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Ingrowth -- Trees that are correctly being tallied for the first
time,
or
trees that are now on timberland.
20
live trees, not previously measured
21
live or dead tree, that was tallied before but should not have
been, and is a tally tree now
22
live or dead tree, that was on nonforest land, and is now on
timberland or other forest land
23
live or dead tree, that was on unproductive, reserved or urban
forest land, and is now on timberland or other forest land
24
dead tree or snag, that was too small to tally before but has
grown to tally size and died since the previous inventory, is a
tally tree now
25
dead tree, should have been tallied, was missed, has since
died, and is now tallied
Code
Removals -- Previously tallied trees that:
(a) have been harvested, killed or presumed to have
been harvested during a cultural operation (logging,
land clearing, TSI work, etc.)
or
(b) are no longer on timberland.
30
the location where the tree is, or was, is still timberland, the
tree has been killed, it can be standing or down
31
the location where the tree was is still forested, the tree has
been removed (usually a stump will be present)
32
the location where the tree is, or was, is now nonforest, the tree
is alive, killed or removed (if no longer alive, it is assumed that
the cause of death was not natural mortality). If the tree is no
longer present, use the old DBH, distance and azimuth
104
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Removals -- continued
33
the location where the tree is, or was, is now unproductive,
reserved, or urban forestland. The tree is alive or has been
killed but is still present (if no longer alive, it is assumed that
the cause of death was not natural mortality)
34
the location where the tree was is now unproductive, reserved,
or urban forestland -- the tree has been removed and is no
longer present
Code
Mortality -- Previously tallied trees that have died since the
last inventory.
40
dead tree --standing or down-- tree is still present; when DBH
measurement is not possible, or current DBH is smaller than
the previous DBH, use previous DBH for current
41
dead, down, disintegrated, no evidence remaining; previously
measured trees that have died and are in advanced stages of
decay or any previously measured tree that cannot be
accounted for
42
dead tree, standing or down, now located on nonforest land
43
dead tree, standing or down, now located on unproductive,
reserved, or urban forest land
44
dead, down, disintegrated, no evidence remaining; the land
where it was located is unproductive, reserved, or urban forest
land
Code
Other Trees
50
tree that was tallied before, but should not have been (was
out), is still out this time, not tallied now (horizontal distance is
>24 ft)
53
trees with a previous tree class of 5 or 6 that are still present
(standing or down).
54
trees with a previous tree class of 5 or 6 that are no longer
present (no evidence of the tree remains).
105
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DIAMETER
Record the actual diameter for each tallied tree to the last whole 0.1 in.
Diameter is diameter at breast height (DBH).
Each unit will apply methods that allow remeasurement of diameter
(DBH) at the same point on the tree bole at successive visits. Valid
methods include measuring distance from the ground to point of
diameter, or marking the point of measurement with an aluminum nail, a
scribe, crayon mark, or paint spot. If scribing is used, the mark should
not penetrate the cambium. If a mark or nail is used, the diameter
should not be taken until the mark or nail is in place. Do not scribe or
nail trees less than 3.0 inches in diameter.
Do not nail or scribe tree species, such as aspen, that are highly
susceptible to damaging agents introduced by these practices.
Remeasurement trees:
The diameter measurement must be taken at the same point on the tree
as the previous measurement, if possible. The point of diameter
measurement should not be moved unless the crew cannot physically
remeasure that point (e.g., forks converge, tree buried by mudslide).
If there was an obvious recording error in the previous measurement
(e.g., past crew measured 31.0 but recorded 13.0), crews should
estimate and record the appropriate past diameter using local
procedures.
For trees on the 24.0 ft radius subplot, measure single-stemmed trees
5.0 inches in diameter or larger.
For trees on the 6.8 ft radius microplot, measure single-stemmed trees
between 1.0 inch and 4.9 inches in diameter.
6.150 DIAMETER AT BREAST HEIGHT (DBH) -- Measure DBH at 4.5
ft above the ground unless one of the special DBH situations listed
below is present. Figures 10-18 show the proper use of the diameter
tape.
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH and all dead tally trees
> 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
MQO: +/- 0.1 in per 20.0 in of diameter on trees with a measured
diameter, at least 95% of the time. For example: a tree with a
diameter of 41.0 in would have a tolerance of plus or minus 0.3
in
Values: 001 to 999
106
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Special DBH situations:
1.
Tree with butt-swell or bottleneck: Measure these trees 1.5 ft above
the end of the swell or bottleneck if the swell or bottleneck extends
3.0 ft or more above the ground (Figure 10).
1.5’
Diameter
point
3.0’ or
more
Figure 10. (1) Tree with swelled butt
2.
Forked tree: If the point of pith separation is at or above 4.5 ft,
consider the tree as one tree (Figure 11). Measure the diameter
below the swell, as near as possible to 4.5 ft above the ground on
the uphill side.
Diameter
point
4.5’
3.5’
Pith intersection
Figure 11. (2) Forked tree
If the point of pith separation is below 4.5 ft above the ground, but
above 1.0 ft, consider each fork a separate tree (Figure 12). For
diameter measurement, measure each fork at 3.5 ft above the point
of pith separation, or as near as possible to this point.
4.5’
4.5’
Figure 12. (2) Two
trees
107
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.
Tree with irregularities at DBH: On trees with swellings (Figure 13),
bumps, depressions, branches (Figure 14), etc. at DBH, diameter
will be measured immediately above the irregularity at the place it
ceases to affect normal stem form.
Diameter
point
4.5’
Figure 13. (3) Tree with
swelling
Diameter
point
4.5’
Figure 14. (3) Tree with
branch
4.
Tree on slope: Measure diameter at 4.5 ft from the ground along
the bole on the uphill side of the tree (Figure 15).
4.5’
Figure 15. (4.) Tree on a
slope
108
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
5.
Leaning tree: Measure diameter at 4.5 ft from the ground
along the bole. The 4.5 ft distance is measured along the
underside face of the bole (Figure 16).
DBH
4.5’
Figure 16.
tree
(5) Leaning
6.
Turpentine tree: On trees with turpentine face extending above 4.5
ft, estimate the diameter at 10.0 ft above the ground and multiply by
1.1 to estimate DBH outside bark.
7.
Independent trees that grow together: Continue to treat them as
two trees.
109
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
8.
Diameter on trees missing a portion of bark or bole at the point of
diameter measurement is measured and recorded to the nearest
0.1 in as the tree actually exists (e.g., do not "reconstruct" the bole)
(Figure 17).
Figure 17. (8) Tree with
broken stem
9.
Live windthrown tree: Measure from the top of the root
collar along the length to 4.5 ft (Figure 18).
Root Collar
4.5’
Figure 18. (9) Tree on
the ground
110
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.155 DIAMETER CHECK – Record the code to identify any
irregularities in diameter measurement positions (e.g., abnormal
swellings, diseases, damage, new measurement positions, etc.) that
may affect the use of this tree in diameter growth/change analyses.
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH and all dead tally trees
> 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
0
1
2
Diameter measured accurately
Diameter estimated
Diameter measured at different location than previous
measurement (remeasurement trees only)
6.160 CONDITION CLASS -- Record the CONDITION CLASS
NUMBER in which each tree is located. Often, a referenced boundary is
approximate, and trees selected for tally are assigned to the actual
condition in which they lie regardless of the recorded approximate
boundary (Figure 9).
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH and all dead tally trees
> 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
Pine
Upland
Figure 9. Ragged CONDITION CLASS boundary and
tree condition class designation.
111
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.170 TREE CONDITION CLASS -- Record one of the following
condition classes for all trees 5.0 in DBH and larger. Broken tops must
be significant enough to introduce rot into the main stem.
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 8
Description
live tree, live intact top
live tree, broken top
live tree, intact dead top
Code
1
2
3
4
dead tree, intact top
5
dead tree, broken top
6
dead tree, down
7
8
snag, intact top
snag, broken top
Comments
Tops may merely be
defoliated -- use with caution.
Before recording as dead,
use a scribe to check the
cambium layer for moisture.
Before recording as dead,
use a scribe to check the
cambium layer for moisture.
Do not tally if advanced
decay is present and wood is
punky.
6.175 LEAN ANGLE -- Record the code that describes the angle of lean
of the tree. Trees supported by other trees or by their own branches are
considered standing.
When Collected: CORE: All live and dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
0
1
2
Standing (less than 45 degrees of lean)
Standing (more than 45 degrees of lean but not
touching the ground)
Down (some part of the bole touching the ground)
112
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.180 TREE GRADE -- Record a tree grade for all softwood trees 9.0 in
DBH, or greater, and all hardwood trees 11.0 in DBH, or greater,
according to the tree grade specifications in Appendix 9. For live trees,
record one-digit codes that correspond to the tree grade numbers.
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees ∞ 9.0 in DBH if softwood,
and ∞ 11.0 in DBH if hardwood
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
Hardwoods Use the Hardwood Tree Grades (grades 1, 2, and 3) or the
Tie and Timber Grade specifications (grade 4) for all hardwood trees.
Grade 5 will be used for trees that do not meet minimum specifications
of the Hardwood Tree Grades or the Tie and Timber Grade.
Eastern White Pine Use the Eastern White Pine Tree Grades, (grades
1 through 4), for Eastern White Pine only. Grade 5 will be used for trees
that do not meet minimum specifications.
Southern Pine The Southern Pine Tree Grades, (grades 1 through 3),
will be used for all pines except Eastern White Pine. Grade 5 will be
used for trees that do not meet minimum specifications. There is no
grade 4 for the Southern Pine Tree Grades.
Spruce, fir, cedar, larch (tamarack), and hemlock Spruce, fir, cedar,
larch (tamarack), and hemlock will be graded as either merchantable
(grade 1), or as cull (grade 5), by their minimum merchantability
specifications.
All dead trees, no matter what species, must receive a tree grade of
zero (0).
Tree grades are often determined on the basis of the best 12 foot
section within the butt 16 feet of the tree (Hardwood Tree Grades,
grades for spruce, fir, cedar, larch, and hemlock). When a 14 foot
section, or the entire 16 feet, of the butt section of the tree gives a better
grade than the 12 foot section, the grade of the longer section is
recorded. The butt section of all trees must be at least 12 feet in length
(pines must be at least 16 feet) in order for the tree to be assigned one
of the merchantable tree grades (grades 1, 2, 3 or 4). Butt sections less
than twelve feet in length must receive a tree grade of 5.
When determining the merchantability of the entire sawlog length of a
tree, the grades of the upper logs must also be considered. The grades
for the upper logs of the tree are not recorded, but these logs must
meet, or exceed, the minimum grade specifications for the tree species.
113
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
If the upper logs and the butt log do not make grade, the entire tree is
cull. (See item 6.210 Board-foot Cull.)
Pines cannot be given a merchantable grade (1 through 4 for white pine
& 1 through 3 for other pines) if they have a fork in the first 16 feet of
bole. Spruce, fir, cedar, larch, and hemlock cannot be give a
merchantable grade if they have a fork in the first 12 feet of bole.
Any section containing metal should be culled. In hardwoods, if you are
able to obtain a 12-foot grading section free of metal in the butt 16 feet
of a tree, then the tree can receive a grade 1-3 or 4 as long as it meets
the other grading criteria. Because hardwood tree grades have a sliding
12-foot grading section in the butt 16 feet, the metal does not
necessarily render a tree grade 5 unless the metal is positioned so it is
impossible to get a 12-foot section free of metal in the butt 16 feet.
In the spruce-fir grades, any metal in the butt 12-foot log will render a
tree grade 5, while in pine tree grades; any metal in the butt 16 foot will
render a tree grade 5. Because softwood tree grades have no sliding
12-foot section in the butt 16 feet.
6.190 SAWLOG LENGTH -- Record sawlog length to the last whole foot
of all sawtimber-sized trees. The measurement should extend from a 1foot stump to (in order of priorities):
1
The point, where no physical log, whether or not merchantable,
can be produced because of excessive limbs, forks, or crooks.
Sawlog length should not extend above this point unless at least
one log, 8 feet or longer, is present.
2
Minimum top sawlog diameter:
3
a)
9" DOB (diameter outside bark) for hardwoods
b)
7" DOB for softwoods
On broken-off trees, to the point of the break.
(A log is a section at least 8 feet long, not containing a fork, sufficiently
straight enough to yield at least an 8-foot board.)
When a tree forks into two or more sawlog-sized sections, measure the
section with the largest diameter immediately above the fork regardless
of its condition or whether the other fork may yield more sawlog length.
Sawlog length, in general, should terminate at the second fork in
hardwood trees. If the sawtimber-sized tree does not contain one 12
foot or two non contiguous 8 foot logs, record 00 for sawlog length.
114
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees ∞ 9.0 in DBH if softwood,
and ∞ 11.0 in DBH if hardwood
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: ! 4 ft, 90% of the time
Values: 00, 12 to 99
6.200 BOLE LENGTH -- For all live and dead trees record bole length
to the nearest whole foot from a 1-foot stump to the first of:
1
The point, where no section, whether or not merchantable, can
be produced because of excessive limbs, forks, or crooks. Bole
length should not extend above this point unless at least one
section, four feet or longer, is present.
2
A four inch top DOB (diameter outside bark)
3
Where the central stem terminates by branching before reaching
four inches DOB. However, bole length can extend up through
major subdivisions of the central stem. When this occurs, the
measurement should follow the largest diameter of the divisions.
4
On broken-off trees, to the point of the break.
Bole length, in general, should terminate at the third fork in hardwood
trees. For trees that fork above DBH, measure length along the larger
diameter fork. Minimum bole length that can be recorded is 4 feet,
otherwise record 00.
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees ∞ 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: ! 4 ft, 90% of the time
Values: 00, 04 to 99
6.205 TOTAL LENGTH -- Record the TOTAL LENGTH of the tree, to
the nearest 1.0 ft, from ground level to the tip of the apical meristem.
For trees growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If
the tree has a broken or missing top (Tree Condition 2, 5 and 8),
estimate what the total length would be if there were no missing or
broken top. Forked trees should be treated the same as unforked trees.
115
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
When Collected:
P2 CORE - All live and dead tally trees > 5.0 in
DBH/DRC
P3 - All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH/DRC and all
standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10% of true length, at least 90% of the time
Values: 005 to 150
6.206 ACTUAL LENGTH -- For trees with broken or missing tops (Tree
Condition 2, 5, and 8), record the ACTUAL LENGTH of the tree to the
nearest 1.0 ft, from ground level to the highest remaining portion of the
tree still present and attached to the bole. If the top is intact (Tree
Condition 1, 3, 4, and 7), this item is omitted. Forked trees should be
treated the same as unforked trees.
When Collected: P2 CORE - All live and dead tally trees (with broken or
missing tops) > 5.0 in DBH/DRC
Maine - All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH and all dead
tally trees > 5.0 in DBH
P3 - All live and standing dead tally trees (with
broken or missing tops) 1.0 –4.9 in DBH/DRC
P3 - All live and standing dead tally trees (with
broken or missing tops) > 5.0 in DBH/DRC
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10% of true length, at least 90% of the time
Values: 005 to 400
6.207 LENGTH METHOD -- Record the code that indicates the method
used to determine tree lengths.
The length for the first three trees encountered on each subplot
must be measured – all others may be estimated.
When Collected:
P2 CORE - All live and dead tally trees > 5.0 in
DBH/DRC
P3 - All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH/DRC and all
standing dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
Total and actual lengths are field measured with a
measurement instrument (e.g., clinometer, relascope,
tape)
Total length is visually estimated, actual length is
measured with an instrument
Total and actual lengths are visually estimated
116
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Field crews are encouraged to measure lengths occasionally on each
subplot as an aid in calibrating their estimates on the other trees.
Indicate any additional trees that are measured – the first three trees per
subplot are just the minimum number of trees to be measured.
6.210 BOARD-FOOT CULL -- Board-foot cull is the volume within the
sawlog length of a tree that cannot be used to produce boards, because
of rot, sweep, crook, excessive limbs, and other defects. The total
board-foot cull for the tree includes the entire volume of sections that do
not meet minimum size, length and grade requirements, and the cull
volume within acceptable sawlog sections.
Some examples are:
A 12-foot section lies between two forks. The section exceeds the
minimum length and diameter requirements for a log, but does not
meet the minimum grade specifications for a 12-foot log. The entire
volume of the 12-foot section is cull unless an 8 or 10-foot log within
the 12-foot section does qualify as a merchantable sawlog. If a 8 or
10 foot section within the 12 foot log does qualify as merchantable,
that 8 or 10 foot section would not be deducted for board foot cull.
The remaining 2 or 4-foot section that kept the initial 12-foot section
from meeting grade would be culled in this example.
A six-foot section of perfectly sound and straight wood lies between
two forks. Since logs cannot contain forks, and since the section is
less than eight feet long, it is not a log. The entire volume of the
six-foot section is cull.
A tree may be assigned a Tree Grade of 5 because it did not contain at
least one 12-foot merchantable (grade 1, 2, 3 or 4) sawlog. However,
the entire volume of the butt log is not necessarily cull, unless it is the
only log in the tree.
If a tree has between 12 and 16 feet of sawlog and it does not contain a
merchantable sawlog, the entire sawlog portion of the tree is cull. All
trees with 16 feet of sawlog, or less that have a tree grade of 5 must be
99% cull. Trees with more than 16 feet of sawlog may also be classified
as cull, depending on the situation. If a tree contains an 8-foot or 10
foot merchantable sawlog, the total cull is the amount of cull within that
sawlog plus the volume of any portion of the butt log that is not part of a
merchantable sawlog.
For tree grading purposes, determine the amount of cull in the butt log
only in order to assign a tree grade to the entire tree for Item 6.180. To
determine the amount of board-foot cull in the tree, it is necessary to
visually divide the entire sawlog length into logs that are 8 feet or longer.
The amount of cull to be recorded is the total volume of logs that do not
meet grade requirements, sections that do not qualify as logs, and the
117
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
amount of cull within sawlogs. Estimate cull volume by using the
appropriate cull estimating aids for sawtimber trees found in Appendix
10.
Record the actual percentage of total board-foot cull, except:
•
cull less than 4 % may be recorded as 00
•
100 % cull is recorded as 99
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees ∞ 9.0 in DBH if softwood,
and ∞ 11.0 in DBH if hardwood
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: ! 10%, 90% of the time
Values: 00 to 99
6.220 PERCENT SOUNDNESS (OF BOARD-FOOT CULL) -- This is a
percentage of the entry made in Item 6.210. Record the code that
indicates the percentage of the board-foot cull that is sound cull. Sound
cull is caused by form defects; sweep, crook, limbs, forks. Sound cull
can consist of entire logs that do not meet the minimum sawlog grade
specifications because of form and sound defects. Percent soundness
can be represented by the following formula.
% sound cull
% total cull
=
% soundness
Codes 0 through 4 indicate predominantly unsound cull, whereas codes
5 through 9 indicate predominantly sound cull.
Each section must be individually assigned a soundness of 0, all rotten,
or 9, all sound.
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees ∞ 9.0 in DBH if softwood,
and ∞ 11.0 in DBH if hardwood
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: ! one class, 90% of the time
Values:
Code
0
1
2
3
4
Percent
0 -- 9
10 -- 19
20 -- 29
30 -- 39
40 -- 49
Code
5
6
7
8
9
118
Percent
50 -- 59
60 -- 69
70 -- 79
80 -- 89
90 -- 100
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Example 1:
A hardwood tree has 32 feet of sawlog. The first section has 15 % cull
and is rotten. The seventh (11%) and eighth (10%) sections are cull
due to form defects, i.e., all sound. The total board foot cull is 36 %.
Twenty-one percent (the amount of cull in sections 7 and 8) of the 36 %
is sound cull, resulting in soundness for the sawlog of 58 %, or code 5
for percent soundness of board-foot cull.
Example 2:
A softwood tree has 16 feet of sawlog. The first section is rotten cull (33
%), and the fourth section is sound cull (19 %). The total cull for the
sawlog is 52 %. Nineteen percent of the 52 % is sound cull, resulting in
a sawlog that has is 37 % sound, or code 3 for percent soundness of
board-foot cull.
6.230 CUBIC-FOOT CULL -- Cubic-foot cull is the volume of the bole
length of a tree that is not suitable for products because of rot, decay,
large limbs, forks, sweep, crook, embedded wire, and other defects.
Starting at the 1-foot stump, visually divide the entire bole length into 4foot sections. Use the following as guides to estimating cubic-foot cull:
•
Sections that contain true forks are cull.
•
Cull any section in which more than 50% of the volume is lost due
to rot.
•
Cull any section that contains wire fence or metal objects such as a
tap for sugar maple.
•
If sweep or crook causes a straight line between the center of each
end of a section to fall outside the bark at any point, the section is
cull. Field personnel may use discretion. For example, a line
stretched from one end to the other end of a 10-foot section of bole
might fall outside the bark at one point. However, if this section
were treated as two 5-foot sections, or a 4-foot and a 6-foot section,
the centerline for each bole would not fall outside the bark. These
sections cannot be less than 4 feet.
119
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
•
Make partial deductions for large bumps and heavy bird peck,
especially when occluded. Make slight deductions for dead limbs, if
it is suspected that pockets of rot lie behind them.
•
Sections that contain limbs whose collars exceed one third of the
stem diameter (DOB) at the point of occurrence.
Determine the percentage of cubic-foot cull in poletimber and sawtimber
trees by using the appropriate cull estimating aids in Appendix 10.
Record the actual percentage of total cubic-foot cull, except:
•
cull less than 4 % cull should be recorded as 00
•
100 % cull is recorded as 99
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees ∞ 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: ! 10%, 90% of the time
Values: 00, 04 to 99
6.240 Percent Soundness (of cubic-foot cull) -- This is a percentage
of the entry made in Item 6.230. Record the code that indicates the
percentage of the cubic-foot cull that is sound cull (due to sweep, crook,
forks, etc.). Percent soundness can be represented by the following
formula.
% sound cull
% total cull
=
% soundness
Codes 0 through 4 indicate cull that is predominantly unsound. Codes
5 through 9 indicate predominantly sound cull. Refer to Percent
Soundness of Board-foot cull section for examples.
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees ∞ 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: ! one class, 90% of the time
Values:
Code
0
1
2
3
4
Percent
0 -- 9
10 -- 19
20 -- 29
30 -- 39
40 -- 49
120
Code
5
6
7
8
9
Percent
50 -- 59
60 -- 69
70 -- 79
80 -- 89
90 -- 100
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.250 CROWN CLASS -- Rate tree crowns in relation to the sunlight
received and proximity to neighboring trees (Figure 20). Base the
assessment on the position of the crown at the time of observation.
Example: a formerly suppressed tree, which is now dominant due to tree
removal, is classified as dominant.
When Collected: All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, at least 85% of the time
Values:
1
Open Grown: Trees with crowns that received full light
from above and from all sides throughout most of its life,
particularly during its early developmental period.
2
Dominant: Trees with crown extending above the general
level of the crown cover and receiving full light from above
and partly from the sides. These trees are taller than the
average trees in the stand and their crowns are well
developed, but they could be somewhat crowded on the
sides.
Also, trees whose crowns have received full light from
above and from all sides during early development and
most of their life. Their crown form or shape appears to be
free of influence from neighboring trees.
3
Co-dominant: Trees with crowns at the general level of
the crown canopy. Crowns receive full light from above
but little direct sunlight penetrates their sides. Usually they
have medium-sized crowns and are somewhat crowded
from the sides. In stagnated stands, co-dominant trees
have small-sized crowns and are crowded on the sides.
4
Intermediate: Trees that are shorter than dominants and
co-dominant, but their crowns extend into the canopy of
co-dominant and dominant trees. They receive little direct
light from above and none from the sides. As a result,
intermediates usually have small crowns and are very
crowded from the sides.
121
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
5
Overtopped: Trees with crowns entirely below the general
level of the crown canopy that receive no direct sunlight
either from above or the sides.
2
5
3
2
4
3
3
2
5
2
1
Rate tree crowns in relation to the sunlight received and proximity to
neighboring trees.
6.260 COMPACTED CROWN RATIO – Record the COMPACTED
CROWN RATIO for each live tally tree, 1.0 in and larger. COMPACTED
CROWN RATIO is that portion of the tree supporting live foliage and is
expressed as a percentage of the actual tree height. To determine
COMPACTED CROWN RATIO, occularly transfer lower live branches to
fill in large holes in the upper portion of the tree until a full, even crown is
visualized.
When Collected: All live tally trees ≥ 1.0 in DBH/DRC
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: +/- 10%, at least 80% of the time
Values: 00 to 99
122
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.264
UNCOMPACTED
CROWN
RATIO
-Record
the
UNCOMPACTED
CROWN
RATIOs
to
the
nearest
1%.
UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO is the percentage of total tree
height supporting live foliage that is effectively contributing to tree
growth. UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO is determined by the
ratio of live crown length to top of live crown (Figure 21). Live crown
length is determined from the last live foliage at the crown top (dieback
in the upper portion of the crown is not part of the live crown) to the
“base of live crown”. Many times, there are additional live branches
below the “base of live crown”. These branches are only included if they
have a basal diameter greater than 1 in and are within 5 ft of the base of
the obvious live crown. The live crown base becomes that point on the
main bole perpendicular to the lowest live foliage on the last branch that
is included in the live crown. The live crown base is determined by the
live foliage and not by the point where a branch intersects with the main
bole.
Figure 21. UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO examples.
123
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Determine sapling LIVE CROWN RATIO by dividing the live crown
length by total tree height to the live crown top. Live crown length is the
distance between the top live foliage (dieback and dead branches are
not included) and the lowest live twig for saplings. The live crown base
for saplings is different from trees 5.0 in DBH/DRC and larger; the 1-in/5
ft rule does not apply in this case. Do not include sprigs (leaves
attached to an unforked woody stem) or leaves on the main stem below
the lowest live twig (Figure 22).
When collected: P2 (CORE OPTIONAL) – All live tally trees ≥ 5.0 in
DBH/DRC – Not collected in ME and PA
P3 (CORE) – All live tally trees > 1.0 in DBH/DRC
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: +/- 10%, at least 90% of the time
Values: 00 to 99
Figure 22. Sapling UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN RATIO
determination examples.
124
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.270 CAUSE OF DEATH – Record a cause of death for all trees that
have died or been cut since the previous survey on remeasure plots.
On new plots, record cause of death for all dead trees. If cause of death
cannot be reliably estimated, record unknown/not sure.
When Collected: All dead trees, and all cut trees on remeasure plots
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, at least 80% of the time
Values:
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Insect damage
Disease damage
Fire damage
Animal damage
Weather damage
Vegetation (suppression, competition, vines/kudzu)
Unknown/not sure/other (include notes)
Human-caused damage (cultural, logging, accidental
damage, etc.)
Physical (hit by falling tree)
TREE DAMAGE
Record up to two different damages per tree. Damage is characterized
according to three attributes: location of damage, type of damage, and
severity of damage. Damages must meet severity thresholds (defined in
section 6.273, DAMAGE SEVERITY) in order to be recorded.
The tree is observed from all sides starting at the roots. Damage signs
and symptoms are prioritized and recorded based on location in the
following order: roots, roots and lower bole, lower bole, lower and upper
bole, upper bole, crownstem, and branches recorded as location code 0
(for no damage), or DAMAGE LOCATION 1-9.
Within any given location, the hierarchy of damage follows the numeric
order of DAMAGE TYPE possible for that location. The numeric order
denotes decreasing significance as the code number goes up, i.e.,
DAMAGE TYPE 01 is more significant than DAMAGE TYPE 25. A
maximum of two damages are recorded for each tree. If a tree has
more than two damages that meet the threshold levels, the first two that
are observed starting at the roots are recorded.
When multiple damages occur in the same place, the most damaging is
recorded. For example, if a canker, DAMAGE TYPE 02, meets the
threshold and has a conk growing in it, record only the canker. Another
example: if an open wound meets threshold and has resinosis, record
only the open wound.
125
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.271 DAMAGE LOCATION 1 -- Record the location on the tree where
DAMAGE TYPE 1 is found (Figure 23). If the same damage continues
into two or more locations, record the appropriate code listed below, or if
the combination of locations does not exist (damage extends from
crownstem to roots), record the lowest location that best describes the
damage (see Figure 24). Multiple damages may occur in the same
location, but record the higher priority damage (lower code number) first.
If the damages are coincident (a conk within a canker), record only the
higher priority damage.
Figure 23. Location codes for damage.
126
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Figure 24. The damage runs from stump to crownstem.
Code here should be 02 (roots and "stump" and lower
bole) which represents the lowest locations of this
multi-location damage.
The “base of the live crown” is defined as the horizontal line which would
touch the lowest part of the foliage, excluding branches towards the
base of the tree which are less than 1.0 inch or more than 5 ft from the
rest of the crown. See Section 6.264 (UNCOMPACTED LIVE CROWN
RATIO) for more details.
When Collected: CORE: All live tally trees > 5.0 in DBH/DRC
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: +/- 1 location class, at least 80% of the time
127
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Values:
0
No damage
1
Roots (exposed) and stump (12 inches in height from
ground level)
2
Roots, stump, and lower bole
3
Lower bole (lower half of the trunk between the stump and
base of the live crown)
4
Lower and upper bole
5
Upper bole (upper half of the trunk between stump and
base of the live crown)
6
Crownstem (main stem within the live crown area, above
the base of the live crown)
7
Branches (>1 in at the point of attachment to the main
crown stem within the live crown area)
8
Buds and shoots (the most recent year’s growth)
9
Foliage
6.272 DAMAGE TYPE 1 -- Record the first damage type observed that
meets the damage threshold definition in the lowest location. Damage
categories are recorded based on the numeric order that denotes
decreasing significance from damage 01 - 31.
When Collected: All tally trees where DAMAGE LOCATION 1 > 0
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, at least 80% of the time
Values:
01
Canker, gall: Cankers may be caused by various agents
but are most often caused by fungi. The bark and
cambium are killed, and this is followed by death of the
underlying wood, although the causal agent may or may
not penetrate the wood. This results in areas of dead
tissue that become deeper and wider, or galling (including
galls caused by rusts), on roots, bole, or branches. Due to
the difficulty in distinguishing some abnormal swellings
(e.g., burls) from classic galls and cankers, all are
recorded as damage 01. A canker may be:
128
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Annual (enlarges only once and does so within an interval
briefer than the growth cycle of the tree, usually less than
one year),
Diffuse (enlarges without characteristic shape or
noticeable callus formation at margins), or
Perennial (enlarges during more than one year - often has
a target appearance).
02
Conks, fruiting bodies, and signs of advanced decay:
Fruiting bodies on the main bole, crownstem, and at the
point of the branch attachment are signs of decay. "Punky
wood" is a sign of decay and is evidenced by soft, often
moist, and degraded tissue.
Cavities into the main bole that are oriented in such a way
that they act as catchment basins for water are signs of
decay. Bird cavities are signs of decay.
Rotten branches or branches with conks are not
indicators of decay unless the threshold is met (>20% of
branches are affected).
Rotting stumps associated with coppice regeneration (e.g.,
northern pin oak, maple) are excluded from coding.
03
Open wounds: An opening or series of openings where
bark has been removed or the inner wood has been
exposed and no signs of advanced decay are present.
Improper pruning wounds that cut into the wood of the
main stem are coded as open wounds, if they meet the
threshold; those which leave the main stemwood intact are
excluded.
04
Resinosis or gummosis: The origin of areas of resin or
gum (sap) exudation on branches and trunks.
05
Cracks and seams (minimum length is 5ft): Cracks in
trees are separations along the radial plane. When they
break out to the surface they often are called frost cracks.
These cracks are not caused by frost or freezing
temperature, though frost can be a major factor in their
continued development. Cracks are most often caused by
basal wounds or sprout stubs, and expand when
temperatures drop rapidly. Seams develop as the tree
attempts to seal the crack, although trees have no
mechanism to compartmentalize this injury.
129
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Lightning strikes are recorded as cracks when they do not
meet the threshold for open wounds.
11
Broken bole or roots (less than 3 ft from bole): Broken
roots within 3 ft from bole either from excavation or
rootsprung for any reason. For example, those which
have been excavated in a road cut or by animals.
Stem broken in the bole area (below the base of the live
crown) and tree is still alive.
12
Brooms on roots or bole: Clustering of foliage about a
common point on the trunk. Examples include ash yellows
witches' brooms on white and green ash and eastern and
western conifers infected with dwarf mistletoes.
13
Broken or dead roots (beyond 3 ft): Roots beyond 3 ft
from bole that are broken or dead.
20
Vines in the crown: Kudzu, grapevine, ivy, dodder, etc.
smothers tree crowns. Vines are rated as a percentage of
tree crown affected.
21
Loss of apical dominance, dead terminal: Mortality of the
terminal of the crownstem caused by frost, insect,
pathogen, or other causes.
22
Broken or dead: Branches that are broken or dead.
Branches with no twigs are ignored and not coded as
dead. Dead or broken branches attached to the bole or
crownstem outside the live crown area are not coded. 20%
of the main, first order portion of a branch must be broken
for a branch to be coded as such.
23
Excessive branching or brooms within the live crown area:
Brooms are a dense clustering of twigs or branches arising
from a common point that occur within the live crown area.
Includes abnormal clustering of vegetative structures and
organs. This includes witches' brooms caused by ash
yellows on green and white ash and those caused by
dwarf mistletoes.
130
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
24
Damaged buds, foliage or shoots:
Insect feeding,
shredded or distorted foliage, buds or shoots >50%
affected, on at least 30% of foliage, buds or shoots. Also
includes herbicide or frost-damaged foliage, buds or
shoots.
25
Discoloration of foliage: At least 30% of the foliage is
more than 50% affected. Affected foliage must be more of
some color other than green. If the observer is unsure if
the color is green, it is considered green and not
discolored.
31
Other: Use when no other explanation is appropriate.
Specify in comments section of PDR for "tree notes."
Code 31 is used to maintain consistency with the Phase 3
crown damage protocols
Legal Combinations of DAMAGE TYPE by DAMAGE LOCATION
For each of the following location codes, possible damage codes and
damage definitions are presented. Minimum damage thresholds are
described in Section 6.273, DAMAGE SEVERITY.
Location 1: Roots and stump
01
02
03
04
05
11
12
13
31
Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference of stump
Conks, fruiting bodies, and signs of advanced decay -- any
occurrence
Open wounds -- exceeds 20% of circumference of stump
Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20%
of circumference of stump
Cracks and seams -- any occurrence
Broken bole or roots less than 3 ft from bole -- any
occurrence
Brooms on roots or bole -- any occurrence.
Broken or dead roots -- exceeds 20% of roots, beyond 3 ft
from bole, broken or dead
Other
Location 2: Roots, stump, and lower bole
01
02
03
Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference of stump
Conks, fruiting bodies, and signs of advanced decay -- any
occurrence
Open wounds – exceeds 20% at the point of occurrence,
or for the portion in root zone, 20% of the circumference of
stump
131
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Location 2: Roots, stump, and lower bole (continued)
04
05
11
12
13
31
Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20%
at the point of occurrence, or for the portion in root zone,
20% of circumference of stump.
Cracks and seams - any occurrence
Broken bole or roots less than 3 ft from bole -- any
occurrence
Brooms on roots or bole - -any occurrence.
Broken or dead roots -- exceeds 20% of roots, beyond 3 ft
from bole, broken or dead
Other
Location 3: Lower bole
01
02
03
04
05
11
12
31
Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference at the point
of occurrence
Conks, fruiting bodies, and signs of advanced decay -- any
occurrence
Open wounds -- exceeds 20% of circumference at the
point of occurrence
Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20%
of circumference at the point of occurrence
Cracks and seams -- any occurrence
Broken bole or roots less than 3 ft from bole -- any
occurrence
Brooms on roots or bole -- any occurrence
Other
Location 4: Lower and upper bole -- same as lower bole.
Location 5: Upper bole - same as lower bole.
Location 6: Crownstem
01
02
03
04
05
21
31
Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference of
crownstem at the point of occurrence
Conks, fruiting bodies, and signs of advanced decay -- any
occurrence
Open wounds - exceeds 20% of circumference at the point
of occurrence -- any occurrence
Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20%
of circumference at the point of occurrence
Cracks and seams -- all woody locations -- any
occurrence.
Loss of apical dominance, dead terminal -- any occurence
Other
132
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Location 7: Branches >1 in at the point of attachment to the main or
crown stem
01
02
03
04
05
20
22
23
31
Canker, gall -- exceeds 20% of circumference on at least
20% of branches
Conks, fruiting bodies and signs of advanced decay -more than 20% of branches affected
Open wounds -- exceeds 20% of circumference at the
point of occurrence on at least 20% of branches
Resinosis or gummosis -- origin of flow width exceeds 20%
of circumference at the point of occurrence on at least
20% of branches
Cracks and seams -- all occurrences, and on at least 20%
of branches
Vines in the crown -- more than 20% of live crown affected
Broken or dead -- more than 20% of branches affected
within the live crown area
Excessive branching or brooms -- more than 20% of
branches affected
Other
Location 8: Buds and shoots
24
31
Damaged buds, shoots or foliage - more than 30% of buds
and shoots damaged more than 50%
Other
Location 9: Foliage
24
25
31
Damaged buds, shoots or foliage - more than 30% of
foliage damaged more than 50%.
Discoloration of foliage - more than 30% of foliage
discolored more than 50%.
Other.
6.273 DAMAGE SEVERITY 1 -- Record a code to indicate the amount
of affected area (above threshold) in DAMAGE LOCATION 1 recorded
for TREE DAMAGE 1. Severity codes vary depending on the type of
damage recorded.
When Collected: All tally trees where DAMAGE LOCATION 1 > 0
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, at least 80% of the time
Values: The codes and procedures for SEVERITY 1 values are defined
for each DAMAGE TYPE 1.
133
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DAMAGE TYPE Code 01 -- Canker, gall
Measure the affected area from the margins (outer edges) of the canker
or gall within any 3-ft vertical section in which at least 20% of
circumference is affected at the point of occurrence. For location 7, and
location 1, 20% of branches and roots beyond 3 ft, respectively, must be
affected, then record in 10% classes. See Figure 25.
Severity classes for code 01 (percent of circumference affected):
Classes
20-29
30-39
40-49
50-59
Code
2
3
4
5
Classes
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
Code
6
7
8
9
Figure 25. A canker which exceeds threshold. Since 40% of
circumference is visible from any side, and since over half the
visible side is taken up by the canker, it obviously exceeds the
20% minimum circumference threshold.
134
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DAMAGE TYPE Code 02 -- Conks, fruiting bodies, and signs of
advanced decay
Severity classes for code 02: None. Enter code 0 regardless of
severity, except for roots > 3 ft from the bole, or number of branches
affected - 20%
DAMAGE TYPE Code 03 -- Open wounds
The damaged area is measured at the widest point between the margins
of the exposed wood within any 3-ft vertical section in which at least
20% of the circumference is affected at the point of occurrence. For
location 7, and location 1, 20% of branches and roots beyond 3 ft,
respectively, must be affected, then record in 10% classes. See Figure
26.
Severity Classes for code 03 (percent of circumference affected):
Classes
20-29
30-39
40-49
50-59
Code
2
3
4
5
Classes
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
Code
6
7
8
9
Figure 26.
Multiple damage in "stump" and lower bole.
A=approximately 40% of tree circumference; B=portion of tree
circumference affected by damage; C=vertical distance within
one meter; D=midpoint of occurence at which circumference is
measured.
135
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DAMAGE TYPE Code 04 -- Resinosis or gummosis
Resinosis or gummosis is measured at the widest point of the origin of
the flow width in which at least 20% of the circumference is affected at
the point of occurrence.
For location 7, and location 1, 20% of
branches and roots beyond 3 ft, respectively, must be affected, then
record in 10% classes.
Severity classes for code 04 (percent of circumference affected):
Classes
20-29
30-39
40-49
50-59
Code
2
3
4
5
Classes
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
Code
6
7
8
9
DAMAGE TYPE Code 05 -- Cracks and seams
Severity class for code 05
Record "0" for the lowest location in which the crack occurs. For
location 7, and location 1, 20% of branches and roots beyond 3 ft,
respectively, must be affected, then record in 10% classes.
DAMAGE TYPE Code 11 -- Broken bole or roots less than 3 ft from bole
Severity classes for code 11:
severity.
None.
Enter code 0 regardless of
DAMAGE TYPE Code 12 -- Brooms on roots or bole
Severity classes for code 12:
severity.
None.
Enter code 0 regardless of
DAMAGE TYPE Code 13 -- Broken or dead roots
At least 20% of roots beyond 3 ft from bole that are broken or dead.
Severity classes for code 13 (percent of roots affected):
Classes
20-29
30-39
40-49
50-59
Code
2
3
4
5
Classes
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
136
Code
6
7
8
9
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DAMAGE TYPE Code 20 -- Vines in crown
Severity classes for code 20 (percent of live crown affected):
Classes
20-29
30-39
40-49
50-59
Code
2
3
4
5
Classes
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
Code
6
7
8
9
DAMAGE TYPE Code 21 -- Loss of apical dominance, dead terminal
Any occurrence ( > 1%) is recorded in 10% classes as a percent of the
crownstem affected. Use trees of the same species and general
DBH/DRC class in the area or look for the detached portion of the
crownstem on the ground to aid in estimating percent affected. If a
lateral branch has assumed the leader and is above where the previous
terminal was, then no damage is recorded.
Severity classes for code 21:
Classes
01-09
10-19
20-29
30-39
40-49
Code
0
1
2
3
4
Classes
50-59
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
Code
5
6
7
8
9
DAMAGE TYPE Code 22 -- Broken or dead branches ( > 1in above the
swelling at the point of attachment to the main or crown stem within the
live crown area)
At least 20% of branches are broken or dead.
Severity classes for code 22 (percent of branches affected):
Classes
20-29
30-39
40-49
50-59
Code
2
3
4
5
Classes
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
137
Code
6
7
8
9
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DAMAGE TYPE Code 23 -- Excessive branching or brooms
At least 20% of crownstem or branches affected with excessive
branching or brooms.
Severity classes for code 23 (percent of area affected):
Classes
20-29
30-39
40-49
50-59
Code
2
3
4
5
Classes
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
Code
6
7
8
9
DAMAGE TYPE Code 24 - Damaged buds, shoots or foliage
At least 30% of the buds, shoots or foliage (i.e., chewed or distorted) are
more than 50% affected.
Severity classes for code 24:
Classes
Code
30-39
40-49
50-59
3
4
5
Classes
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
Code
6
7
8
9
DAMAGE TYPE Code 25 - Discoloration of Foliage
At least 30% of the foliage is more than 50% affected.
Severity classes for code 25 (percent affected):
Classes
Code
30-39
40-49
50-59
3
4
5
Classes
60-69
70-79
80-89
90-99
Code
6
7
8
9
DAMAGE TYPE Code 31 -- Other
Severity classes for code 31:
None. Enter code 0 regardless of severity. Describe condition in tree
notes.
Examples are shown in Figures 27-33.
138
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Figure 27. Examples of damage coding.
139
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Figure 28. Examples of damage coding.
140
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Figure 29. Examples of damage coding.
141
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Figure 30. Examples of damage coding.
142
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Figure 31. Examples of damage coding.
143
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Figure 32. Examples of damage coding.
144
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Figure 33. Examples of damage coding.
145
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Procedures to Record Multiple Occurrences of the Same Damage
Damage codes 01 (canker), 03 (open wounds), and 04
(resinosis/gummosis) must meet a threshold of 20 percent of the
circumference at the point of occurrence, within any 3-ft section.
Multiple cankers or open wounds which are directly above one another
pose no more threat to long term tree survival than would a single
damage incidence of the same width. However, should multiple
damages be located horizontally within any 3-ft section, the
translocation of water and nutrients would be significantly affected. The
widths of each individual damage are added and compared as a
percent, to the total circumference at the midpoint of the 3-ft section
(Figure 24).
Procedures to Measure Circumference Affected
A practical approach is to observe every face of the "stump", bole, or
crownstem. About 40% of the circumference of a face can be observed
at any one time. The damage is measured horizontally between the
margins. If the cumulative area affected within a 3-ft section exceeds
1/2 of any face, then the 20% minimum threshold has been met. The
percent of the circumference affected by damage is then estimated in
10% classes. If in doubt, measure the damage and circumference at
the widest point of occurrence on the bole with a linear tape, and
determine the percent affected.
6.274 DAMAGE LOCATION 2 -- Record the location on the tree where
TREE DAMAGE 2 is found. Follow the same procedures as for
DAMAGE LOCATION 1.
6.275 DAMAGE TYPE 2 -- RECORD the second damage type
observed that meets the damage threshold definition in the lowest
location. Follow the same procedures as for DAMAGE TYPE 1.
6.276 DAMAGE SEVERITY 2 -- Record the amount of affected area
(above threshold) in DAMAGE LOCATION 2 recorded for DAMAGE
TYPE 2. Follow the same procedures as for DAMAGE SEVERITY 1.
146
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.290 TREE CLASS -- This code represents a classification of the
overall quality of trees that are 5.0 inches DBH and larger. Tree Class
classifies the quality of sawtimber trees based on their present
condition.
Tree class for poletimber trees is a prospective
determination -- a forecast of potential quality when and if the tree
becomes sawtimber size.
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees ∞ 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: no errors, 90% of the time
Values:
Code
1
Description
Preferred -- this is the kind of tree that would be favored in
cultural operations. Mature trees, that are older than the rest
of the stand; have less than 20 percent total board foot cull;
are expected to live for 10 more years: and are low risk
trees.
The following are offered as general guideline requirements
for preferred trees. Crews may use their discretion in
applying the guidelines, except for the first one dealing with
damage.
2
•
must be free from general damage
•
should have no more than 10 percent board-foot
cull due to form defect
•
should have good vigor, usually indicated by a
crown ratio of 30% or more
•
a sawtimber tree with a grade 1 butt log would
usually qualify as a preferred tree
Acceptable -- this class includes:
•
live sawtimber trees that do not qualify as
preferred trees but are not cull trees
•
live poletimber trees that prospectively will not
qualify as preferred trees, but are not now or
prospectively cull trees
147
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3
Rough Cull -- this class includes:
•
live sawtimber trees which:
do not now contain one merchantable 12 foot
sawlog or two non contiguous 8 foot sawlogs
have more than 67 percent board-foot cull,
more than half of which is sound cull
•
live poletimber trees which:
prospectively will not contain one 12 foot
merchantable sawlog or two noncontiguous 8
foot merchantable sawlogs primarily because
of sound cull.
These trees may be
merchantability class 0 or 1 now, depending
on their current cubic-foot cull content.
4
Rotten Cull -- trees which are identical to rough cull trees
except that the critical factor is unsound cull, i.e., trees with
over 67% cull, more than half of which is unsound. These
trees may be merch class 0 or 2 now depending on their
current cubic foot cull content.
5
Dead -- trees that have recently died (within the last several
years); but still retain many branches (including some small
branches and possibly some fine twigs); and have bark that is
generally tight and hard to remove from the tree.
6
Snag -- a dead tree, or what remains of a dead tree, that is at
least 4.5 feet tall and is missing most of its bark. This category
includes trees covered with bark that is very loose. This bark
can usually be removed, often times in big strips, with very little
effort. Snags are not recently dead trees. Most often, they will
have been dead for several years -- sometimes, for more than
a decade.
148
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.300 Merchantability Class -- This item classifies sawtimber and
poletimber trees on the basis of the relative amounts of sound and
unsound cull present (board-foot cull for sawtimber trees, and cubic-foot
cull for poletimber trees).
When Collected: All live and dead tally trees ∞ 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: no errors, 90% of the time
Values:
0
1
2
no cull (0-3%)
cull that is present is predominantly sound cull
cull that is present is predominantly unsound cull
Note: The combinations of Tree Class 3 with Merch Class 2, and Tree
Class 4 with Merch Class 1 are illegal for sawtimber.
6.305 MORTALITY YEAR -- Record the estimated year that
remeasured trees died or were cut. For each remeasured tree that has
died or been cut since the previous inventory, record the 4-digit year in
which the tree died. Mortality year is also recorded for trees on land that
has been converted to a nonforest land use, if it can be determined that
a tree died before the land was converted.
When Collected: All live trees at time 1 and all dead or removed trees
at time 2 (Note: This field is not required until the
next full cycle.)
Field width: 4 digits
MQO: +/- 1 year, 70% of the time for remeasurement cycles of 5 years;
+/- 2 years, 70% of the time for remeasurement cycles of > 5
years
Values: 1995 or higher
6.310 DECAY CLASS -- Record for each standing dead tally tree, 5.0
inches in diameter and larger, the code indicating the trees stage of
decay.
When Collected: All dead tally trees > 5.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: ±1 class, at least 90% of the time
Values: Use the following table for guidelines:
Note:
Characteristics are for Douglas-fir. Dead trees of other species
may vary somewhat. Use this only as a guide.
149
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DECAY CLASS
Decay
stage
(code)
Limbs and
branches
Top
% Bark
Remaining
100
Sapwood
presence
and
*
condition
Intact;
sound,
incipient
decay,
hard,
original
color
Sloughing;
advanced
decay,
fibrous,
firm to
soft, light
brown
All
present
Pointed
2
Few
limbs, no
fine
branches
May be
broken
Variable
3
Limb
stubs only
Broken
Variable
Sloughing;
fibrous,
soft, light
to reddish
brown
4
Few or no
stubs
Broken
Variable
Sloughing;
cubical,
soft,
reddish to
dark
brown
5
None
Broken
Less than 20
Gone
1
150
Heartwood
*
condition
Sound,
hard,
original
color
Sound at
base,
incipient
decay in
outer edge
of upper
bole, hard,
light to
reddish
brown
Incipient
decay at
base,
advanced
decay
throughout
upper bole,
fibrous, hard
to firm,
reddish
brown
Advanced
decay at
base,
sloughing
from upper
bole, fibrous
to cubical,
soft, dark
reddish
brown
Sloughing,
cubical,
soft, dark
brown, OR
fibrous, very
soft, dark
reddish
brown,
encased in
hardened
shell
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
6.320 UTILIZATION CLASS -- Record the code to identify cut trees that
have been removed from the site.
When Collected:
(Note: This field is not required.
generated during data processing.)
It will be
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
0
1
Not utilized - can still be found on the site
Utilized – some portion of the tree cannot be found on site,
assumed to have been removed
6.330 PREVIOUS DBH -- Transfer the DBH measured at the previous
occasion from previous tally sheets.
When Collected: All remeasured trees
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: copy directly from previous records
6.340 PREVIOUS TREE CLASS / MERCHANTABILITY CLASS -Transfer the TREE CLASS and MERCHANTABILITY CLASS
information recorded at the previous occasion from previous tally
sheets.
When Collected: All remeasured trees
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: copy directly from previous records
6.350 NOTES -- This three-digit field can be used to record common
items of interest about the tree being tallied. Each note is one character
long. Enter up to three notes per tree.
When Collected: All tally trees > 1.0 in DBH
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: N/A
Values:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
No notes
Witness tree
High DBH
Low DBH
Abnormal DBH
Metal (wire, nails, etc.) in butt log
Species misidentified at previous occasion
One of a clump of two, or more, trees
Fork, crook, or split in the first sixteen feet
Not listed, see General Notes for details
151
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
152
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
7.000 SITE TREE INFORMATION
Site trees are a measure of site productivity expressed by the height to
age relationship of dominant and co-dominant trees. If suitable site
trees are available, site tree data are required for every accessible
forestland condition class defined on a plot. An individual site tree may
be used for more than one condition class where differences in condition
classes are not the result of differences in site productivity. For
example, when different condition classes are caused solely due to
differences in reserved status, owner class, and/or disturbance-related
differences in density (e.g., heavily thinned vs. unthinned), a site tree
may be used for more than one condition class. When in doubt, do not
use a site tree for more than one condition class.
SITE TREE SELECTION
Select at least 1 site tree for each accessible forest land condition class;
select tree from a species common to the condition class being
sampled, based on regional or local tree species selection criteria
(Appendix 2 lists preferred site tree species by region). Select trees off
the subplot where possible. Use only trees that have remained in a
dominant or co-dominant crown position throughout their entire life span.
If possible, trees should be 5.0 in DBH, or larger, and at least 20 years
old. Trees that are visibly damaged, trees with ring patterns that exhibit
signs of suppression, and trees with rotten cores should be rejected. If
there are no acceptable site trees, record that in the plot notes and
leave this section blank.
SITE TREE DATA VARIABLES
7.001 SITE TREE NUMBER -- Record the corresponding record
number of the site tree within the plot, beginning with 1 for the first site
tree. Note that since site trees are generally not tally trees, this number
will generally be different from TREE NUMBER.
When Collected: All site trees
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
153
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
7.005 SUBPLOT NUMBER -- Enter the code that indicates from which
subplot the data is being collected.
When collected: All subplots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
Center subplot
North subplot
Southeast subplot
Southwest subplot
7.100 CONDITION CLASS NUMBER -- Record the CONDITION
CLASS NUMBER that the site index data from this tree represent.
When collected: All site trees
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9
7.105 CONDITION CLASS LIST -- List all CONDITION CLASS
NUMBERS that the site index data from this tree represent.
When Collected: All site trees
Field width: 5 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 9 or 10000 to 98765
7.110 SPECIES -- Record the appropriate SPECIES code from the list
in Appendix 4. If you encounter a species not listed in Appendix 4 and
are not sure if it should be tallied as a tree, consult your Field
Supervisor. If the species cannot be determined in the field, tally the
tree, but bring branch samples, foliage, cones, flowers, bark, etc. to your
supervisor for identification. If possible, collect samples outside the
subplots from similar specimens and make a note to correct the
SPECIES code later. Use the generic SPECIES code only when you
encounter a tree where you know tree species but the species is not on
the species list.
When Collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors for genus 100% of the time, no errors for species at
least 95% of the time
Values: See Appendix 4
154
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
7.120 DIAMETER -- Record the actual diameter for each tallied tree to
the last whole 0.1 in. Measure DBH at 4.5 ft above the ground. If
abnormalities are present that prevent taking a diameter measurement
at 4.5 ft, the tree is probably not a good candidate for a site tree.
When Collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits (xx.y)
MQO: +/- 0.1 in per 20.0 in of diameter on trees with a measured
diameter, at least 95% of the time
Values: 001 to 999
7.130 SITE TREE LENGTH -- With a clinometer or other approved
instrument, measure the total length of the site tree from the ground to
the top of the tree. Record to the nearest 1.0 ft. SITE TREE LENGTH
must be measured; no estimates are permitted on site trees.
When Collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 10% of true length, at least 90% of the time
Values: 001 to 999
7.140 TREE AGE AT DIAMETER -- Record the tree age as determined
by an increment sample. Bore the tree at the point of diameter
measurement (DBH/DRC) with an increment borer. Count the rings
between the outside edge of the core and the pith. Do not add years to
get total age.
When Collected: All site trees
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: +/- 5 years, at least 95% of the time
Values: 001 to 999
155
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
8.000 OWNERSHIP INFORMATION
8.100 Ownership Information -- This is usually one of the first items
completed by a field crew. The process begins with a trip to the local
tax office to review plat maps, examine aerial photos and interview the
tax collector in an attempt to determine who is the owner of the property
where the plot is located. Once the general location of a plot is known,
attempt to contact the landowner for permission to install the plot and to
confirm the landowner's complete mailing address.
There can be many problems related to accessing a plot. It is frequently
not possible or practicable to contact a landowner prior to installing a
plot. Advance notice must be given to a landowner if keys are needed
for access to property. Permission must be obtained if the property is
posted against trespassing. Supervisors will provide assistance and
instructions for these and other situations.
Although ownership information is only required for plots that are
forested at plot center, it is often a good idea to collect ownership
information on all of the plots in the county, or town, while you are at the
tax office. This is especially true in states or regions where there is a
relatively small amount of nonforest land. The time spent gathering this
extra information during your first visit to the tax office will usually be a
fraction of the time spent on a return visit after you discover that a
previously nonforest plot has reverted to forestland.
When the
landowner information can be obtained, refer to the following:
•
enter one (1) letter or character per space
•
if more space is needed, continue on the second line
•
if the first line is adequate for the name, begin the address on the
second line and continue on through the third line if needed
•
the fourth line is used only for the city or town, state, and zip
code
•
enter the source of the information e.g., owner, town clerk,
neighbor, tax maps, on the indicated line
•
on the last line, enter the identification numbers (township, plat
number, lot number, deed number, etc.) of the information, if they
are available
157
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
8.110 Information Quality -- Enter a code that best describes the
reliability of the ownership information.
When Collected: All plots with forestland
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
0
Unknown
1
Poor, somebody thought the owner was....
2
Good, source was neighbor or someone who was
quite sure
3
Verified, information came from owner, tax maps,
public agency, or more than one reliable source.
8.120 Owner Contact – This area of the tally sheet covers several
items related to landowner contact. This information is very helpful
when a sample plot has to be visited more than once. There is an area
to document attempts made to contact a landowner, as well as the
method that permission was obtained. There is also an area to indicate
whether the property, where the center subplot is located, is posted to
prevent trespassing. These items must be completed for all forested
plots, and may also be helpful on some of the nonforest plots.
When Collected: All plots with forestland
Field width: 1 character
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: check Yes or No
Plots that Straddle Multiple Owners -- During the course of obtaining
ownership information from public tax offices take special note of plots
that are close to, or overlap, a parcel boundary. If these situations are
noted during the ownership collection process and the name and
address of the second landowner are acquired, then it becomes
possible to ask permission of that landowner at the beginning of the
process instead of risking delay and refusal after work on the plot has
already begun.
158
Note to NEFG 1.4 user.
Page numbers jump from 158 to 167.
Pages 159 through 166 do not exist.
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
9.000 NONFOREST / DENIED ACCESS / HAZARDOUS PLOTS
Overview
This section describes field procedures for attempted, field-visited
nonforest, denied access, and hazardous plots. These plots are of
interest from the standpoint that they may once have been forest or that
they may revert to forest or become accessible in the future. Thus, they
are monitored to account for lands that move into and out of the
forestland base. Only basic plot identification data are recorded on
these plots.
A plot is considered nonforest if no part of it is currently located
in forestland (CURRENT PLOT STATUS = 1). A plot is
inaccessible if access is prevented to the entire plot by the
landowner or because of some hazardous situation.
No ground plots are established at nonforest or inaccessible
sample locations. If a forested plot has been converted to
nonforest, or becomes inaccessible, the previous data are
reconciled and an attempt is made to visit the plot during the
next inventory. If a nonforest plot becomes forest or access is
gained to a previously inaccessible plot, a new forest ground
plot is installed. All nonforest and inaccessible plots are visited
if there is any reasonable chance that they might include some
forestland condition class.
PROCEDURE
Trees on previously forestland plots will be reconciled at data
processing. There is a distinction between plots that have been
clearcut, and plots that have been converted to another land use. A
clearcut plot is considered forestland until it is actively converted to
another land use. The procedures in this section do not apply to
clearcuts unless and until the land is converted to a nonforest use.
Additional information concerning land use classifications is contained in
Chapter 4.
In cases where a plot is inaccessible, but obviously contains no
forestland, assign the plot to the appropriate nonforest land
use. Access-denied and hazardous land uses are utilized only
if there is a possibility the plot contains forest.
It is not necessary to establish or maintain any starting points,
witness trees, boundaries, etc., on nonforest or inaccessible
plots.
167
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DATA RECORDED
3.100 STATE -- Record the unique FIPS (Federal Information
Processing Standard) code identifying the state where the plot center is
located.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: See Appendix 1
3.110 UNIT -- Record the unique code that identifies the inventory unit
where the plot center is located.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: See Appendix 1
3.120 COUNTY -- Record the unique FIPS (Federal Information
Processing Standard) code identifying the county where the plot center
is located.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: See Appendix 1
3.130 PLOT NUMBER -- Record the four-digit number that permanently
identifies each field plot. Plot numbers are unique within a county. Do
not ever change a plot number. Bring any suspected errors to the
attention of your supervisor.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 4 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 0001 to 9999
168
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.140 SAMPLE KIND -- Record the code that describes the kind of plot
being established.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
Initial plot establishment
3
Replacement plot – replaces a previously established plot
because the plot could not be relocated, or the data was lost
6
Remeasurement of an NEFIA plot – remeasurement of a
previously established fixed radius plot that was new at the
previous occasion
7
Remeasurement of an NEFIA plot – remeasurement of a
previously established fixed radius plot that was remeasured
at the previous occasion
8
Remeasurement of an NEFIA plot – remeasurement of a
previously established variable radius plot that was
remeasured at the previous occasion
3.145 PHASE -- Record the code that indicates the phase of the sample
plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
2
3
Phase 2 (FIA only) plot
Phase 3 (FIA and FHM) plot
169
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.155 QA STATUS -- Record the code to indicate the type of plot data
collected, using the following codes:
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Standard production plot
QA field plot (cold check by QA crew)
Reference plot (off grid)
Training/practice plot (off grid)
Botched plot file (disregard during data processing)
QA check plot (complete remeasurement by a different crew)
3.160 MONTH -- Record the two-digit code for the month that the plot
visit occurred.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
January
February
March
April
May
June
01
02
03
04
05
06
July
August
September
October
November
December
07
08
09
10
11
12
3.170 DAY -- Record the day of the month that the plot visit occurred.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 01 to 31
3.180 YEAR -- Record the year that the plot visit occurred.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: Beginning with 1998, constant for a given year
170
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.190 PREVIOUS LAND USE -- Transfer this information from the old
tally sheets. The codes used during the previous inventory are listed
below:
When collected: All plots that are being remeasured
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
Forest Land
20
40
51
50
51
52
timberland
unproductive forestland
unproductive reserved forestland
productive reserved forestland
Christmas tree plantation
urban forestland
Nonforest Land
Without trees
with trees
61
63
65
67
69
70
71
72
73
62
64
66
68
--------74
75
77
79
81
83
85
76
78
80
82
84
86
cropland
improved pasture
idle farmland
other farm land
bog
marsh
salt marsh
swamp
maintained rights-of-way,
regardless of width
mining and wasteland
developed recreation area
industrial and commercial land
tract and/or multiple family housing
single-family custom housing
other (specify in general notes)
Water
91
92
census water
noncensus water
171
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.200 PREVIOUS MONTH -- Transfer this information from the old tally
sheet.
When collected: All plots that are being remeasured
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 01 to 12
3.210 PREVIOUS YEAR -- Transfer this information from the old tally
sheet.
When collected: All plots that are being remeasured
Field width: 2 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1988, 1989, 1990, 1993, 1994, 1995
3.220 CRUISER -- Enter the three-digit numeric code of the person that
cruised the plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: As assigned
3.230 TALLY -- Enter the three-digit numeric code of the person that
tallied the plot.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: As assigned
GPS COORDINATES
Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates will be recorded for all
field plots, regardless of land use. The Portable Lightweight Global
Positioning Receiver (PLGR), manufactured by Rockwell, Inc. will be
used in all instances.
GPS UNIT SETTINGS, DATUM, and COORDINATE SYSTEM
Consult the GPS unit operating manual or other regional instructions to
ensure that the GPS unit internal settings, including Datum and
Coordinate system, are correctly configured.
172
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Each FIA unit will determine the Datum to be used in that region. Most
will use the NAD 27 Datum (also known as NAS-C or NA 27
CONUS/CLK66), but coordinates collected using any appropriate datum
can be converted back to a national standard for reporting purposes.
Each FIA unit will also determine which coordinate system to use.
Regions using a Geographic system will collect coordinates in Degrees,
Minutes, and Seconds of Latitude and Longitude; those using the UTM
coordinate system will collect UTM Easting, Northing, and Zone.
PLGR PROCEDURES
Each morning while traveling to the plot in the vehicle, connect the
PLGR to the cigarette lighter adapter and external antenna and run it for
15 minutes or until the horizontal error is less than ± 70 ft appears on
the POS screen. This step is only necessary before the first plot of the
day. Once this step has been completed the PLGR may be turned off
until it is needed at the plot.
It is important that this effort to “warm-up” the PLGR be taken every
morning. It is equally important that the PLGRs are kept charged and
that a full set of backup batteries is kept with each unit. Recent changes
in the way sample plots will be established will cause crews to rely on
their GPS receivers more than they have in the past. A functioning fully
charged GPS receiver will often be the key to having a successful day in
the field.
Establishing a course to plot for new plots: At SP, start the PLGR
and wait (3 to 5 minutes) until the horizontal error is less than ± 70 ft
appears on the POS screen. Switch the PLGR to “average” mode and
log 180 position fixes. Write the 180th position displayed on the PLGR
in the SP GPS section of the Page 3 tally sheet.
Press the “WP” key and ENTER this SP coordinate as a new waypoint.
Press “WP” key again and ENTER the “plot coordinates” from the label
on the Page 3 tally sheet. Press “WP” again and toggle to “DIST”.
Press the down arrow key and change the first WP number to SP and
the second WP number to PC. The PLGR will calculate the range and
azimuth to traverse on the ground to reach PC. Record this information
in item 2.120 Course to Plot on the Page 3 tally sheet and proceed with
the traverse to PC.
Geo-referencing plot center for all plots where PC is occupied:
After completing the traverse to PC from either the PLGR calculations or
by using the previous course to plot information, stand at PC and hold
the Rockwell PLGR antenna plumb over the dowel. Wait (3 to 5
minutes) until the PLGR indicates the horizontal error is less than ± 70 ft
on the POS screen.
173
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
When the horizontal error is less than ± 70 ft is achieved, indicating the
highest possible accuracy, press and hold the POS key until AVG
appears. Allow the counter to average 180 fixes. As the counter nears
180, be prepared to tell the tally person the coordinate, who then
records them on page 3 of the tally sheet. Press and hold the POS key
to stop averaging. Press the OFF key twice.
For new nonforest plots where PC is not occupied:
After
establishing and recording a course to plot using the PLGR, enter “plot
coordinates” from the label on the Page 3 tally sheet for items 3.310 –
3.360. (Note: Enter this coordinate only if traverse is not completed
and PC is not occupied. If PC is occupied, follow the procedure
previously described in “geo-referencing plot center.”)
For remeasure nonforest plots where the previous SP is still
present: Stand at the old starting point (SP) and collect coordinates as
previously described. Write the 180th position displayed on the PLGR in
the SP GPS section of the Page 3 tally sheet.
Press the “WP” key and enter this coordinate as a new waypoint. Press
“WP” key again and toggle to “RNG-CALC”. Activate the menu and
change the default waypoint number to the waypoint you previously
entered. Enter the previously calculated values for distance and
azimuth to PC (i.e., previous course to plot) into the PLGR in the “RNG”
and “AZ” fields by pressing the “NUM LOCK” key. Press the down
arrow key to see the calculated position of PC. Enter this coordinate in
the PC GPS section of the Page 3 tally sheet in items 3.310 through
3.360. (Note: Enter this coordinate only if traverse is not completed
and PC is not occupied. If PC is occupied, follow the procedure
previously described in “geo-referencing plot center.”)
For remeasure nonforest plots where the previous SP is not
present: Using the old photography follow the instructions in sections
2.000 – 2.120 to establish a new course to plot. Stand at the new SP
and collect coordinates as previously described. Write the 180th
position displayed on the PLGR in the SP GPS section of the Page 3
tally sheet.
Press the “WP” key and enter this coordinate as a new waypoint. Press
“WP” key again and toggle to “RNG-CALC”. Activate the menu and
change the default waypoint number to the waypoint you previously
entered. Enter the previously calculated values for distance and
azimuth to PC into the PLGR in the “RNG” and “AZ” fields by pressing
the “NUM LOCK” key. Press the down arrow key to see the calculated
position of PC. Enter this coordinate in the PC GPS section of the Page
3 tally sheet in items 3.310 through 3.360. (Note: Enter this coordinate
only if traverse is not completed and PC is not occupied. If PC is
occupied, follow the procedure previously described in “geo-referencing
plot center.”)
174
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
COLLECTING READINGS
Collect at least 180 GPS readings at the plot center, which will then be
averaged by the GPS unit. Each individual reading should have an error
of less than 70 ft if possible (the error of all the averaged readings is far
less).
Soon after arriving at plot center, use the GPS unit to attempt to collect
coordinates. If suitable readings (180 readings at error < 70 ft) cannot
be obtained, try again before leaving the plot center.
If it is still not possible to get suitable coordinates from plot center,
attempt to obtain them from a location within 200 ft of plot center.
Obtain the azimuth and horizontal distance from the "offset" location to
plot center. If a PLGR unit is used, use the Rng-Calc function in the
PLGR to compute the coordinates of the plot center.
Coordinates may be collected further than 200 ft away from the plot
center if a laser measuring device is used to determine the horizontal
distance from the "offset" location to plot center. Again, if a PLGR unit
is used, use the Rng-Calc function in the PLGR to compute the
coordinates of the plot center.
In all cases try to obtain at least 180 readings before recording the
coordinates.
3.310 DEGREES OF LATITUDE -- Enter the degrees of latitude as
shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (DD)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.320 MINUTES OF LATITUDE -- Enter the minutes of latitude as
shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (MM)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
175
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.330 SECONDS OF LATITUDE -- Enter the seconds and hundredths
of seconds of latitude as shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 4 digits (SSSS)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.340 DEGREES OF LONGITUDE -- Enter for the degrees of longitude
as shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (DD)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.350 MINUTES OF LONGITUDE -- Enter the minutes of longitude as
shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (MM)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.360 SECONDS OF LONGITUDE -- Enter the seconds and
hundredths of seconds of longitude as shown on the GPS receiver.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 4 digits (SSSS)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
3.361 NUMBER OF READINGS -- Record a 3-digit code indicating how
many readings were averaged by the GPS unit to calculate the plot
coordinates. Collect at least 180 readings if possible.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1 to 999
3.365 ELEVATION -- Record the elevation above mean sea level of the
plot center, in feet, as determined by GPS.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 5 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: -00100 to 20000
176
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
3.370 LOCATION OF GPS READING -- Enter a one-digit code to
indicate where the GPS reading for the plot was taken.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
reading was taken over plot center
2
reading was taken from a location other than over plot
center
3.375 GPS ERROR -- Record the error as shown on the GPS unit to the
nearest foot. Make every effort to collect readings only when the error is
less than 70 ft. However, if after trying several different times during the
day, at several different locations, this is not possible, record the best
reading that can be obtained with an error of up to 999 ft.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 3 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 0 to 70 if possible, 71 to 999 if an error of less than 70 cannot
be obtained
3.380 GPS SERIAL NUMBER -- Record the last six digits of the serial
number on the GPS unit used.
When collected: When GPS UNIT > 0
Field width: 6 digits
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 000001 to 999999
3.400 MANUAL VERSION -- Record the version number of the National
Core Field Guide that was used to collect the data on this plot. This will
be used to match collected data to the proper version of the field
manual.
When collected: All plots
Field width: 2 digits (x.y)
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values: 1.1 (Maine 1999) and higher
177
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
4.310 CONDITION STATUS -- Record the code that describes the
status of the condition. Record for all condition classes sampled on a
plot. The instructions beginning on page 40 (“Determination of Condition
Class”) and the instructions starting on this page (“Determining
Condition Classes Differing in Condition Status”) apply when delineating
condition classes that differ by CONDITION STATUS.
When collected: All Nonforest / Denied Access / Hazardous plots
Field width: 1 digit
MQO: No errors, 100% of the time
Values:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Accessible forestland
Nonforest land
Noncensus water
Census water
Denied access area
Area too hazardous to visit
Area that is not in the sample, e.g., in Canada or Mexico.
4.320 Land Use Class
The following land use definitions and codes contain new definitions and
codes that are used to describe Other Forest Land. The concept of
Other Forest Land is a significant departure from the way land use has
previously been classified by FIA at the Northeastern Research Station.
All field employees are advised to read this section carefully, and to ask
questions if there are any concerns. It is your obligation to understand
these instructions and apply them consistently.
Assign a current land use class for each condition class that occurs on a
plot or subplot. To qualify as a separate land use, the area in question
must be an area at least one acre in size (strips must be at least 120
feet wide), on which the predominant land use is the same. A strip that
is 120 feet wide would have to be 363 feet long in order to be one acre
(43,560 square feet) in size. Inclusions of less than one acre, with two
exceptions, are considered the same land use. The exceptions are: (1)
maintained rights-of-way, which are nonforest land (codes 73 or 74),
regardless of their width, and (2) any permanent features such as
buildings.
********************************************************************************
Field crews are required to notify a supervisor of all plots that are
assigned a Land Use Class that differs from the Previous Land Use
Class or the current PI Class, within one week of the date that the
plot was completed.
********************************************************************************
178
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
LAND USE DEFINITIONS
FOREST LAND
Land at least 10 percent stocked by forest trees of any size, or land that
formerly had such tree cover and is not currently developed for a
nonforest use. The minimum area for classification as forestland is one
acre. Roadside, streamside, and shelterbelt strips of timber must have
a crown width at least 120 feet to qualify as forestland. Unimproved
roads and trails, streams and other bodies of water, or natural clearings
in forested areas shall be classified as forest, if less than 120 feet in
width or an acre in size. Grazed woodlands, reverting fields, and
pastures that are not actively maintained are included if the above
qualifications are satisfied. Also, see definitions of nonforest land, idle
farmland and improved/maintained pasture.
NOTE: See the explanation of Stocking Levels in Appendix 6.
TIMBERLAND -- Code 20
Forestland that is producing or capable of producing crops of industrial
wood and is not withdrawn from timber utilization by statute or
administrative designation. (Land withdrawn from timber utilization must
be publicly owned land. See the definitions of Reserved, Unproductive
Reserved, and Reserved Other Forest land.)
NOTE: Areas qualifying as timberland have the capability of producing
in excess of 20 cubic feet per acre per year of industrial wood under
management.
Currently inaccessible and inoperable areas are
included, except when the areas involved are small and unlikely to
become suitable for the production of industrial wood in the foreseeable
future.
Timberland may be nonstocked provided that neither any natural
condition, nor any activity by humans, prevents or inhibits the
establishment of tree seedlings.
********************************************************************************
OTHER FOREST LAND -- Code 30
Forestland that is producing, or capable of producing, crops of industrial
wood, but is associated with, or part of a nonforest land use. In the
past, these areas would have been treated as inclusions in the
nonforest land use because they were considered part of a
development. The minimum area for classification as other forestland is
one acre. Roadside, streamside, and shelterbelt strips of timber must
have a crown width at least 120 feet wide to qualify as other forestland.
Unimproved roads and trails, streams and other bodies of water, or
179
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
natural clearings in forested areas classified as Other Forest shall also
be classified as Other Forest, if less than 120 feet in width or an acre in
size. Some examples of land that could be classified as other forest
land are forested portions of city parks, forested land in highway
medians and rights-of way, forested areas between ski runs, and
forested areas within golf courses. Generally, although surrounded by
nonforest development, these areas have not been developed
themselves, and exhibit natural, undisturbed understories.
UNPRODUCTIVE OTHER FOREST LAND -- Code 31
Other forestland that is incapable of producing 20 cubic feet per acre
per year of industrial wood under natural conditions, because of adverse
site conditions.
NOTE: Adverse conditions include sterile soils, dry climate, poor
drainage, high elevation, steepness, and rockiness. Vegetation, if
present, is widely spaced and scrubby, or tree growth cannot become
established.
OTHER
FOREST
LAND
RESERVED
ADMINISTRATIVE DECISION -- Code 32
by
STATUTE
or
Other forestland that is sufficiently productive to qualify as timberland,
but is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or by law.
UNPRODUCTIVE RESERVED OTHER FOREST LAND -- Code 33
Other forest land that is incapable of producing 20 cubic feet per acre
per year of industrial wood under natural conditions, because of adverse
site conditions, and is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public
agency or by law.
NOTE: Adverse conditions include sterile soils, dry climate, poor
drainage, high elevation, steepness, and rockiness. Vegetation, if
present, is widely spaced and scrubby, or tree growth cannot be
established.
********************************************************************************
180
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
UNPRODUCTIVE FOREST LAND -- Code 40
Forestland that is incapable of producing 20 cubic feet per acre per year
of industrial wood under natural conditions, because of adverse site
conditions.
NOTE: Adverse conditions include sterile soils, dry climate, poor
drainage, high elevation, steepness, and rockiness. Vegetation, if
present, is widely spaced and scrubby, or tree growth cannot become
established.
UNPRODUCTIVE RESERVED FOREST LAND -- Code 41
Forest land that is incapable of producing 20 cubic feet per acre per
year of industrial wood under natural conditions, because of adverse site
conditions, and is withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or
by law.
NOTE: Adverse conditions include sterile soils, dry climate, poor
drainage, high elevation, steepness, and rockiness. Vegetation, if
present, is widely spaced and scrubby, or tree growth cannot be
established.
RESERVED by STATUTE or ADMINISTRATIVE DECISION -- Code 50
Forestland that is sufficiently productive to qualify as timberland, but is
withdrawn from timber utilization by a public agency or by law.
CHRISTMAS TREE PLANTATIONS -- Code 51
Forestland that is sufficiently productive to qualify as timberland, but is
withdrawn from timber utilization for exclusive use in Christmas tree
production. There must be evidence of annual shearing, or other
management practices that indicate the exclusive use. (See Appendix 5
for specific instructions.)
URBAN FOREST LAND -- Code 52
Land that, except for its location, would ordinarily be classified as
timberland. This land is either nearly (surrounded on three sides), or
completely, surrounded by urban development, whether commercial,
industrial or residential. This land meets all of the criteria for timberland,
that is, at least one acre; capable of producing at least 20 cubic feet per
acre per year of industrial wood; is not developed for some use other
than timber production; is not reserved by a public agency. It is
extremely unlikely that such land would be used for timber products on a
continuing basis. Such land may be held for future development, or
scheduled for development. (The timber that is present may be utilized
181
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
only at the time of development.) The land may be undeveloped due to
periodic flooding, low wet sites, steep slopes, or their proximity to
industrial facilities that are unfavorable to residential development.
Forested areas within city parks are not urban forest land. They may be
Other Forest Land if the requirements for Other Forest Land are met,
otherwise, they would be nonforest land. City Parks cannot be classified
as Urban Forest Land as it is currently defined.
NONFOREST LAND
Land that does not support, or has never supported, forests, and lands
formerly forested where use for timber management is precluded by
development for other uses. (Note: Includes areas used for crops,
maintained/ improved pasture, residential areas, city parks, improved
roads of any width and adjoining rights-of-way, power line clearings of
any width, and noncensus water.) If intermingled in forest areas,
unimproved roads and nonforest strips must be more than 120 feet
wide, and clearings, etc., more than one acre in size, to qualify as
nonforest land. Although there may be some stocking, the critical
classification factor is the predominant use being made of the land. Do
not confuse with urban forest land.
NONFOREST LAND WITH TREES
This is a land use on which trees 5 inches DBH and larger are present,
but the predominant use is other than forest land.
Following are the nonforest definitions and codes. Enter odd numbered
codes are for nonforest land uses without trees and the even numbered
codes for nonforest land with trees.
CROPLAND ⎯ without trees Code 61 with trees Code 62
Land that currently supports agricultural crops including silage and feed
grains, bare farm fields resulting from cultivation or harvest, and
maintained orchards and nurseries.
IMPROVED / MAINTAINED PASTURE -- without trees Code 63
trees Code 64
with
Land maintained and used and for grazing (not including grazed
cropland). Evidence of maintenance, besides the degree of grazing,
includes condition of fencing, presence of stock ponds, periodic brush
removal, seeding, or mowing. Land that generally has less than 10
percent stocking in live trees (established seedlings or larger trees),
except that occasional large trees with the obvious function of providing
182
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
shade for livestock, and small single trees or clusters of hawthorn or
eastern redcedar should be ignored when determining stocking.
Grazing should be so intense that forest reproduction (except for
hawthorn and eastern redcedar) could not occur naturally -- this would
be evident if all other vegetation were closely browsed.
IDLE FARMLAND -- without trees Code 65 with trees Code 66
Former cropland or pasture that has not been tended within the last 2
years and that has less than 10 percent stocking with live trees,
(established seedlings or larger trees) regardless of species. (Note: A
field that is between crop rotations should not be called idle, however,
cropland.)
OTHER FARMLAND -- without trees Code 67 with trees Code 68
Other farmland is all nonforest land on a farm excluding cropland,
pasture, and idle farmland. It includes farm lanes, stock pens, and
farmsteads. Specify the specific land use in the General Notes
BOG (nonforest) -- Code 69
Wet, spongy land characteristically having a thick layer of peat. It is rich
in plant residues, usually acidic, and frequently surrounds a body of
open water. Characteristic florae are sedges, heaths, and sphagnum.
NOTE: Bogs are not always nonforest. Some tree species such as
black spruce can adapt to bog conditions. If the stocking requirement is
met, the land is considered forestland. The decision as to whether the
land is productive or unproductive will be made by the field crews. (LU
20 or 40).
MARSH -- Code 70
A tract of soft, wet land, often periodically inundated and always
treeless. It is usually characterized by grasses, cattails or other
monocotyledons (i.e., lilies, lady slippers, sedges).
SALT MARSH -- Code 71
Flat land that is subject to intermittent or occasional overflow by salt
water, containing water that is brackish to strongly saline. A salt marsh
supports saltwater adapted plants that usually consist chiefly of grasses.
183
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
SWAMP (nonforest) -- Code 72
Wet, spongy land saturated and sometimes partially or intermittently
covered with water.
Such land supports natural vegetation
predominantly of shrubs, and/or trees.
NOTE: Swamps are not always nonforest. Some tree species readily
adapt to the swamp conditions. If the stocking requirement is met, the
land is considered forestland. The decision of whether the land is
productive or unproductive will be made by the field crews. (LU 20 or
40)
RIGHTS - of - WAY -- without trees Code 73 with trees Code 74
Highways, railroads, airports, pipelines, power lines, canals
MINING and WASTE LAND -- without trees Code 75
76
with trees Code
Surface mining, gravel pits, dumps, landfills.
DEVELOPED RECREATION SITE -- without trees Code 77 with trees
Code 78
Parks, campgrounds, playing fields, athletic and sports tracks.
INDUSTRIAL / COMMERCIAL LAND -- without trees Code 79
trees Code 80
with
Supply yards, parking lots, shopping centers, factories, etc.
MULTIPLE FAMILY HOUSING -- without trees Code 81
Code 82
with trees
More than one family household per structure, for example,
condominiums, townhouses, row houses and apartment buildings.
SINGLE FAMILY HOUSING -- without trees Code 83 with trees Code
84
One family or person per structure
OTHER -- without trees Code 85 with trees Code 86
Includes any category of nonforest land use not mentioned previously.
Describe each situation, in detail, in the General Notes section.
184
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
CENSUS WATER -- Land Use Code 91
Rivers that are more than 200 feet wide or bodies of water that are more
than 4.5 acres in size (includes lakes, the ocean, reservoirs). This
category is not sampled. If a new plot falls in census water, it should be
turned in and an alternate plot will be selected. If a remeasure plot now
falls in census water, record a land use of 91, reconcile any trees that
may have been present on the last occasion, and turn in the plot.
NONCENSUS WATER -- Code 92
Noncensus water includes streams and rivers between 30 feet and 200
feet in width, and bodies of water between 1 and 4.5 acres in size. The
Bureau of Census classifies such water as land and therefore it will be
sampled. It should be treated as any other nonforest land use.
185
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
186
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 1
State and County FIPS Codes
187
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
188
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
State
09
Connecticut
10
Delaware
11
23
District of
Columbia
Maine
24
Maryland
Unit
County
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
001
003
005
007
009
011
013
015
001
003
005
001
Fairfield
Hartford
Litchfield
Middlesex
New Haven
New London
Tolland
Windham
Kent
New Castle
Sussex
District of Columbia
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
6
7
8
8
8
8
9
9
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
029
003
019
009
021
011
013
015
027
025
001
005
023
031
007
017
003
005
011
013
015
021
025
027
029
031
033
035
041
043
009
017
037
019
Washington
Aroostook
Penobscot
Hancock
Piscataquis
Kennebec
Knox
Lincoln
Waldo
Somerset
Androscoggin
Cumberland
Sagadahoc
York
Franklin
Oxford
Anne Arundel
Baltimore
Caroline
Carroll
Cecil
Frederick
Harford
Howard
Kent
Montgomery
Prince George's
Queen Anne's
Talbot
Washington
Calvert
Charles
St. Mary's
Dorchester
189
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
State
24
Maryland
25
Massachusetts
33
New
Hampshire
34
New Jersey
Unit
County
4
4
4
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
039
045
047
001
023
001
003
005
007
009
011
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
Somerset
Wicomico
Worcester
Allegany
Garrett
Barnstable
Berkshire
Bristol
Dukes
Essex
Franklin
Hampden
Hampshire
Middlesex
Nantucket
Norfolk
Plymouth
Suffolk
Worcester
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
003
007
009
001
005
011
013
015
017
019
001
003
005
007
009
011
013
015
017
019
021
023
025
027
029
031
033
Carroll
Coos
Grafton
Belknap
Cheshire
Hillsborough
Merrimack
Rockingham
Strafford
Sullivan
Atlantic
Bergen
Burlington
Camden
Cape May
Cumberland
Essex
Gloucester
Hudson
Hunterdon
Mercer
Middlesex
Monmouth
Morris
Ocean
Passaic
Salem
190
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
State
34
New Jersey
36
New York
Unit
County
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
035
037
039
041
019
033
045
087
089
011
029
037
051
053
055
063
067
069
073
075
099
117
121
123
035
043
049
065
031
041
113
003
009
013
101
007
015
017
023
025
077
097
107
109
001
021
057
191
Somerset
Sussex
Union
Warren
Clinton
Franklin
Jefferson
Rockland
St. Lawrence
Cayuga
Erie
Genesee
Livingston
Madison
Monroe
Niagara
Onondaga
Ontario
Orleans
Oswego
Seneca
Wayne
Wyoming
Yates
Fulton
Herkimer
Lewis
Oneida
Essex
Hamilton
Warren
Allegany
Cattaraugus
Chautauqua
Steuben
Broome
Chemung
Chenango
Cortland
Delaware
Otsego
Schuyler
Tioga
Tompkins
Albany
Columbia
Montgomery
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
State
36
New York
39
Ohio
Unit
County
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
083
091
093
115
005
027
039
047
059
061
071
079
081
085
095
103
105
111
119
001
015
025
053
071
079
087
131
141
145
009
073
105
115
127
163
167
013
019
031
059
067
075
081
111
119
121
157
192
Rensselaer
Saratoga
Schenectady
Washington
Bronx
Dutchess
Greene
Kings
Nassau
New York
Orange
Putnam
Queens
Richmond
Schoharie
Suffolk
Sullivan
Ulster
Westchester
Adams
Brown
Clermont
Gallia
Highland
Jackson
Lawrence
Pike
Ross
Scioto
Athens
Hocking
Meigs
Morgan
Perry
Vinton
Washington
Belmont
Carroll
Coshocton
Guernsey
Harrison
Holmes
Jefferson
Monroe
Muskingum
Noble
Tuscarawas
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
State
39
Ohio
Unit
County
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
005
007
029
035
043
055
077
085
093
099
103
133
139
151
153
155
169
017
023
027
037
045
047
049
057
061
089
097
109
113
129
135
165
003
011
021
033
039
041
051
063
065
069
083
091
095
101
193
Ashland
Ashtabula
Columbiana
Cuyahoga
Erie
Geauga
Huron
Lake
Lorain
Mahoning
Medina
Portage
Richland
Stark
Summit
Trumbull
Wayne
Butler
Clark
Clinton
Darke
Fairfield
Fayette
Franklin
Greene
Hamilton
Licking
Madison
Miami
Montgomery
Pickaway
Preble
Warren
Allen
Auglaize
Champaign
Crawford
Defiance
Delaware
Fulton
Hancock
Hardin
Henry
Knox
Logan
Lucas
Marion
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
State
39
Ohio
42
Pennsylvania
Unit
County
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
107
117
123
125
137
143
147
149
159
161
171
173
175
043
055
057
061
067
087
099
109
119
003
005
007
019
039
049
059
063
073
085
125
129
023
027
031
033
035
047
053
065
081
083
105
113
117
194
Mercer
Morrow
Ottawa
Paulding
Putnam
Sandusky
Seneca
Shelby
Union
Van Wert
Williams
Wood
Wyandot
Dauphin
Franklin
Fulton
Huntingdon
Juniata
Mifflin
Perry
Snyder
Union
Allegheny
Armstrong
Beaver
Butler
Crawford
Erie
Greene
Indiana
Lawrence
Mercer
Washington
Westmoreland
Cameron
Centre
Clarion
Clearfield
Clinton
Elk
Forest
Jefferson
Lycoming
Mc Kean
Potter
Sullivan
Tioga
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
State
42
Pennsylvania
44
Rhode Island
50
Vermont
Unit
County
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
121
123
009
013
021
051
111
015
025
037
069
079
089
093
097
103
107
115
127
131
001
011
017
029
041
045
071
075
077
091
095
101
133
001
003
005
007
009
005
009
011
013
015
017
019
023
001
195
Venango
Warren
Bedford
Blair
Cambria
Fayette
Somerset
Bradford
Carbon
Columbia
Lackawanna
Luzerne
Monroe
Montour
Northumberland
Pike
Schuylkill
Susquehanna
Wayne
Wyoming
Adams
Berks
Bucks
Chester
Cumberland
Delaware
Lancaster
Lebanon
Lehigh
Montgomery
Northampton
Philadelphia
York
Bristol
Kent
Newport
Providence
Washington
Caledonia
Essex
Franklin
Grand Isle
Lamoille
Orange
Orleans
Washington
Addison
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
State
54
West Virginia
Unit
County
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
003
007
021
025
027
001
003
007
023
027
031
033
037
041
057
065
071
075
077
083
091
093
097
101
005
015
019
025
039
045
047
055
059
063
067
081
089
109
009
011
013
017
021
029
035
043
049
196
Bennington
Chittenden
Rutland
Windham
Windsor
Barbour
Berkeley
Braxton
Grant
Hampshire
Hardy
Harrison
Jefferson
Lewis
Mineral
Morgan
Pendleton
Pocahontas
Preston
Randolph
Taylor
Tucker
Upshur
Webster
Boone
Clay
Fayette
Greenbrier
Kanawha
Logan
McDowell
Mercer
Mingo
Monroe
Nicholas
Raleigh
Summers
Wyoming
Brooke
Cabell
Calhoun
Doddridge
Gilmer
Hancock
Jackson
Lincoln
Marion
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
State
54
West Virginia
Unit
County
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
051
053
061
069
073
079
085
087
095
099
103
105
107
197
Marshall
Mason
Monongalia
Ohio
Pleasants
Putnam
Ritchie
Roane
Tyler
Wayne
Wetzel
Wirt
Wood
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
198
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 2
Eastern U.S. Site-Tree Selection Criteria
and
FIA Forest Type Algorithm for the U.S.
199
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
200
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Eastern U.S. Site-Tree Selection Criteria
Ideally, site trees in the eastern U.S. should be between 20-70 years
old. If preferred trees cannot be found in this age range, expand the
age range to 15-120 years. Reject trees outside the 15-120 year age
range, trees that exhibit signs of damage, trees with ring patterns that
show signs of suppression, trees less than 5.0 inches DBH, trees with
abnormalities at DBH, and trees with rotten cores. A list of preferred
site-tree species are provided below. Site trees should be selected in
the following order of preference:
1st Choice: representative of the stand, on the list below for your
region.
2nd Choice: representative of the stand, on the list below for an
adjoining eastern region.
3rd Choice: not representative of the stand, on the list below for your
region.
4th Choice: not representative of the stand, on the list below for an
adjoining eastern region.
Last Choice: any suitable non-woodland tree on the general tree list.
Note: NE = Northeast, NC = North Central, SO = Southern
Code
012
043
068
070
071
094
095
097
105
110
125
128
129
130
131
132
241
261
Common Name
Region
-------------------- Softwood Species -------------------balsam fir
NE, NC
Atlantic white-cedar
NE
eastern redcedar
NE, NC
larch (introduced)
NE
tamarack (native)
NE, NC
white spruce
NE, NC
black spruce
NE, NC
Red spruce
NE
jack pine
NE, NC
shortleaf pine
NE, SO
red pine
NE, NC
pond pine
NE, SO
eastern white pine
NE, NC, SO
Scotch pine
NE, NC
loblolly pine
NE, SO
Virginia pine
NE, SO
northern white cedar
NE, NC
eastern hemlock
NE
201
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
316
317
318
371
375
402
407
531
541
543
544
611
621
742
743
746
802
806
812
813
817
827
830
832
833
835
837
901
951
972
Common Name
Region
-------------------- Hardwood Species -------------------red maple
NE, NC
silver maple
NE, NC
sugar maple
NE, NC
yellow birch
NE, NC
paper birch
NE, NC
bitternut hickory
NE, NC
shagbark hickory
NE, NC
American beech
NE
white ash
NE, NC
black ash
NE, NC
green ash
NE, NC
sweetgum
NE, SO
yellow-poplar
NE, SO
eastern cottonwood
NE, NC,SO
bigtooth aspen
NE, NC
quaking aspen
NE, NC
white oak
NE, NC,SO
scarlet oak
NE, SO
southern red oak
NE, SO
cherrybark oak
NE, SO
shingle oak
NE, SO
water oak
NE, SO
pin oak
NE, SO
chestnut oak
NE, SO
northern red oak
NE, NC, SO
post oak
NE, SO
black oak
NE, NC, SO
black locust
NE
American basswood
NE, NC
American elm
NE, NC
202
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Start
Total stocking<10?
Nonstocked
Yes
No
No
Hardwoods>softwoods?
Yes
Go to H
5% of softwoods<=subalpine fir<50% of softwood
and
5% of softwoods<=engelmann spruce<50% of softw
Engelmann spruc
subalpine fir predo
No
Yes
Sprucesubalpine fir
predom.
Engelmann sprucesubalpine fir(266)
Engelmann spruce predom
Subalpine fir predom.
Blue spruce predom.
True firs
and spruce
predom.
Western
hemlocks
predom.
Subalpine fir(268)
Blue spruce(269)
Western hemlock predo
Western hemlock(301)
Mountain hemlock predom
Mountain hemlock(270)
Pacivic silver fir predom.
True firs
predom.
Engelmann spruce(265)
Pacific silver fir(264)
White fir predom
White fir(261)
Grand fir predom
Grand fir(267)
Subalpine fir predom
Subalpine fir(268)
Red fir predom.
Red fir(262)
Noble fir predom
Noble fir(263)
Alaska yellow cedar predom.
Alaska yellow cedar(271
Western white pine predom.
Western white pine(241
Sitka spruce
hemlock
predom.
Western hemlock predom
Western hemlock(301)
Sitka spruce predom
Sitka spruce(305)
Western redcedar predom
Western redcedar(304)
Redwood predom
Redwoods
predom.
Redwood(341)
Giant sequoia predom
Giant sequoia(342)
Douglas fir predom.
Douglas fir(201)
Douglas fir-larch-western white pine predom
Go to A
Other Western softwoods predo
Go to B
Eastern pines predom
Go to C
Eastern spruce-fir predom
Go to D
Pinyon-juniper predom
Go to E
Exotic softwoods predom
Go to F
Fig. 1. Forest Inventory and Analysis forest type algorithm for the United States.
203
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Douglass fir predom.
Douglass firwestern larc
predom.
Douglas fir(201)
Western larch predom
Western larch(321)
western redcedar predom
Western redcedar(304)
Douglas fir predom.
Douglas fir(201)
Ponderosa pine predom.
Ponderosa pine(221)
Lodgepole pine predo
A
Douglas fir-larch
western white pines
predom.
Douglas firwestern pine
predom.
Western larch
pine predom
Lodgepole pine(281)
Port-orford cedar predom
Port-orford cedar(202)
Sugar pine predom.
Sugar pine(224)
Incense cedar predom
Incense cedar(222)
Jeffrey-coulter pine-bigcone douglas fir pre
Jeffrey-Coulter pineBigcone douglas fir(223
Western larch predom
Western larch(321)
Ponderosa pine
Ponderosa pine(221)
Lodgepole pine predom.
Lodgepole pine(281)
Knobcone pine predom.
Knobcone pine(361)
Southwest white pine predom
Southwest white pine(362)
Bishop pine predom.
B
Other Wester
softwoods
predom.
Bishop pine(363)
Monterey pine predom
Monterey pine(364)
Foxtail-bristlecone pine predom
Foxtail-bristlecone pine(365)
Limber pine predom.
Limber pine(366)
Whitebark pine predom
Whitebark pine(367)
Miscellaneous western softwoods pre
Red-white-jack
pine
predom.
No
Misc. Western softwoods(368
White pine-hemlock at least 50% of t
and
5%<=Eastern white pine<50%
and
5%<=Eastern hemlock<50%?
Eastern white pine predom
C
Longleaf-slash
pine
predom.
Eastern white pine(103)
Red pine(102)
Jack pine predom
Jack pine(101)
Longleaf pine predom
Slash pine predom
Loblolly-shortlea
pine
predom.
Eastern white pine
Hemlock(104)
Red pine predom
Eastern hemlock predom
Eastern pine
predom.
Yes
Eastern hemlock(105)
Longleaf pine(141)
Slash pine(142)
Loblolly pine predom
Loblolly pine(161)
Shortleaf pine predom
Shortleaf pine(162)
Virginia pine predom
Virginia pine(163)
Sand pine predom
Table mountain pine predo
Sand pine(164)
Table mountain pine(165)
Pond pine predom
Pond pine(166)
Pitch pine predom
Pitch pine(167)
Spruce pine predom
Fig. 1. Cont.
204
Spruce pine(168)
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Upland
spruce-fir
predom.
No
D
Eastern
spruce-fir
predom.
Yes
Balsam fir predom
White spruce predom
Lowland
spruce-fir
predom.
E
Balsam fir-red spruce
at least 50% of total
and
5%<=Balsam fir<50%
and
5%<=red spruce<50%?
Pinyon-Juniper
predom.
Red spruce(123)
Black spruce(125)
Tamarack predom
Tamarack(126)
Northern white cedar predo
Northern white cedar(127)
Eastern redcedar predom
Eastern redcedar(181)
Rocky mountain juniper predom
Rocky mountain juniper((182
Pinyon-juniper predom.
Scotch pine predom.
H
Australian pine predom
Hardwoods
predom.
Go to T
Juniper woodland(184)
Pinyon-juniper woodland(185
Scotch pine(381)
Australian pine(382
Other exotic softwoods(383)
Eastern redcedar predom
Eastern redcedarhardwood(402)
Shortleaf pineoak(404)
Eastern white pine predom
Eastern white pinered oak-white ash(401)
Longleaf pine predom
Longleaf pineoak(403)
Virginia pine predom
Virginia pineSouthern red oak(405)
Loblolly pine predom
Loblolly pinehardwood(406)
Slash pine predom.
Slash pinehardwood(407)
Jack pine or Red pine or
Sand pine or Table mountain pine o
Pitch pine or Pond pine or Spruce p
predom.
Other pinehardwood(409)
Yes
No
Western juniper(183)
Other exotic softwoods predom
Shortleaf pine predom
Oak-pine
at least 25% of total?
White spruce(122)
Black spruce predom
Western juniper predom.
Exotic softwoods
predom.
Balsam fir(121)
Red spruce predom.
Juniper woodland predom
F
Red spruce-balsam fir(124)
Fig. 1. Cont.
205
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
I
Maple-beech-birc
predom.
Black cherry at least 50% of tota
Black cherry(802)
Yes
No
Red maple at least 50% of tota
No
Red maple-upland(80
Yes
Cherry-ash-yellow poplar predo
Cherry-ash-yellow poplar(803
Hard maple-basswood pred
Hard maple-basswood(805)
Elm-ash-locust predom
Elm-ash-locust(807)
Maple-beech-yellow birch predo
Maple-beech-yellow birch(801)
Cottonwood at least 50% of total?
J
Yes
Cottonwood(703)
No
Elm-ash-cottonwo
predom.
Willow at least 50% of tota
Yes
Willow(704)
No
No
L
Oak-gum-cypres
predom.
Red maple at least 50% of tota
Yes
Red maple-lowland(708
River birch-sycamore predo
River birch-sycamore(702)
Sycamore-pecan-elm predo
Sycamore-pecan-elm(705)
Black ash-elm-maple predo
Black ash-elm-maple(701)
Sugarberry-elm-green ash pred
Sugarberry-elm-green ash(706)
Silver maple-American elm pred
Silver maple-American elm(7
Cottonwood-willow predom
Cottonwood-willow(709)
Oregon ash predom.
Oregon ash(722)
Atlantic white cedar at least 50% of to
Yes
Atlantic white cedar(606)
No
Sweetbay-swamp tupelo-red maple pr
Swamp chestnut-cherrybark oak pred
Sweetbay-swamp tupelo-red maple(608)
Swamp chestnut-cherrybark oak(601)
Sweetgum-nuttall-willow oak pred
Sweetgum-nuttall-willow oak(602)
Cypress-water tupelo predo
Cypress-water tupelo(607)
Overcup oak-water hickory pred
Overcup oak-water hickory(605)
Fig. 1. Cont.
206
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
K
Oak-hickory
predom.
White oak at least 50% of total sto
Yes
White oak(504)
Yes
Bur oak(509)
No
Bur oak at least 50% of total stoc
No
Chestnut oak at least 50% of total stoc
Yes
Chestnut oak(502)
Yes
Northern red oak(505)
Yes
Scarlet oak(510)
Yes
Yellow poplar(511)
Yes
Black walnut(512)
Yes
Black locust(513)
No
Northern red oak at least 50% of total st
No
Scarlet oak at least 50% of total stock
No
Yellow poplar at least 50% of total stoc
No
Black walnut at least 50% of total stoc
No
Black locust at least 50% of total stoc
No
Red maple at least 50% of total stock
Red maple-oak(51
Yes
No
Yes
Is one of the following at least
25% of oak-hickory stocking:
(Post-blackjack oak,Chestnut-black-scarle
White oak-red oak-hickory,Southern scrub
Yellow poplar-white oak-red oak,
Sweetgum-yellow poplar,Sassafras-persim
Post-blackjack oak predom
Post-blackjack oak(501)
Chestnut-black-scarlet oak(515)
White oak-red oak-hickory predo
White oak-red oak-hickory(503)
Yellow poplar-white oak-red oak pred
Yellow poplar-white oak-red oak(506)
Southern scrub oak predom
Southern scrub oak(514)
Sweet gum-yellow poplar predo
Sweetgum-yellow poplar(508)
Mixed upland hardwoods pre
Aspen predom.
Aspen-birch
predom.
Mixed upland hardwoods(520)
Chestnut-black-scarlet oak pred
Sassafras-persimmon predo
M
No
Sassafras-persimmon(507)
Mixed upland hardwoods(520)
Aspen(901)
Balsam poplar predom
Paper birch predo
Balsam poplar(904)
Paper birch(902)
Fig. 1. Cont.
207
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
N
O
P
Q
R
S
Alder-maple
predom.
Western oak
predom.
Tan oak-laur
predom..
Other wester
hardwoods
predom.
Tropical hardwood
predom.
Exotic hardwood
predom.
Red alder predom.
Red alder(911)
Bigleaf maple pred
Bigleaf maple(912)
California black oak pred
California black oak(922
Oregon white oak predo
Oregon white oak(923)
Blue oak predom.
Blue oak(924
Gray pine predom.
Gray pine(921
Coast live oak predom.
Coast live oak(931)
Canyon-interior live oak pred
Canyon-interior live oak(932)
Deciduous oak-woodlan
Deciduous oak-woodland(925
Evergreen oak-woodlan
Evergreen oak-woodland(926
Tan oak predom.
Tan oak(941)
California laurel predom
California laurel(942)
Giant chinkapin predom
Giant chinkapin(943)
Pacific madrone predom
Pacific madrone(951)
Mesquite-woodland predom.
Mesquite-woodland(952)
Mountain brush woodland pre
Mountain brush woodland(953)
Intermountain maple woodland pre
Intermountain maple woodland(954)
Miscellaneous western hardwoods pred
Miscellaneous western hardwoods(955
Palm predom
Sable palm(981)
Mangrove predom.
Mangrove(982)
Paulownia predom
Paulownia(991)
Melaluca predom.
Melaluca(992)
Eucalyptus predom
Eucalyptus(993)
Other exotic hardwoods pred
Other exotic hardwoods(995)
SPECIAL MIXED CONIFER TEST FOR CALIFORNIA - IMPLEMENTED AFTER FOREST TYPE IS DETERM
State is California?
Forest type is Douglas fir and county is not 15, 23, 41, 45, 55, 81, 85, 87
or forest type is Sugar pine or Incense cedar
or forest type is Ponderosa pine or Jeffrey pine and Ponderosa pine < 80%
or forest type is white fir or red fir and true firs < 80% of total?
Yes
No
No
Yes
California mixed conifer(371)
End
Fig. 1. Cont.
208
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Oak-pine less than
25% of total
T
Chestnut oak > 0
Add Southern red
to Chestnut oak
Yes
No
Post-blackjack oak > 0
Yes
Add Southern red
to Post-blackjack o
Black ash > 0?
Add American elm,red maple,
silver maple, white ash, eastern cotton
to Black ash-American elm-red map
Yes
No
Upland
site?
Add sweetgum, upland-lowland o
American elm, winged-cedar el
holly, and black gum to Oak-hick
Yes
Southern region?
No
No
Add Upland-lowland oa
to Oak-gum-cypress
Oak-gum-cypress>0?
Yes
No
Add American elm
Winged-cedar elm
Elm-ash-cottonwo
Elm-ash-cottonwood>
Add
upland-lowland hardwo
beech, black cherry
to Oak-hickory
Yes
Red maple at least 50% of t
or
upland-lowland hardwoods
beech+black cherry < 50% o
and oak-hickory > 5% of tot
Add Upland-lowland hardwood
Sweetgum,American elm,beech,
Blackgum, pin oak to Oak-gum-cy
No
Add upland-lowland
hardwoods, beech,
Black cherry,American e
to Maple-beech-birch
Add Upland-lowland hardwo
Sweetgum, Black walnut t
Elm-ash-cottonwood
Yes
Add
upland-lowland hardwo
beech, black cherry
to Oak-hickory
Yes
No
Maple-beech-birc
> 5% of total?
No
Yes
Oak-gum-cypress>0?
Yes
No
Oak-hickory>Maple-beech-b
Yes
Add upland-lowland hardwo
Black cherry, Beech
to Oak-hickory
Red oak+yellow popla
Black walnut < 50% of to
No
No
Add Upland-lowland hardwo
Black cherry, Beech
to Maple-beech-birch
Maple-beech-birch predom
Elm-ash-cottonwood predo
Go to I
Go to J
Oak-hickory predom.
Go to K
Oak-gum-cypress predom
Go to L
Aspen birch predom.
Go to M
Alder-maple predom
Go to N
Western oaks predom
Go to O
Tan oak-laurel predom
Go to P
Other western hardwoods predo
Go to Q
Tropical hardwoods predom.
Exotic hardwoods predom
Go to R
Go to S
Fig. 1. Cont.
209
Yes
Add northern red oak
yellow poplar, Black wa
to maple-beech-birch
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
210
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 3
Forest Land Productivity Guide
211
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
212
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Forest Land Productivity Guide
The table below may be used by field crews to assist in the
determination of unproductive forest land; that is, land on which the
potential productivity is less than 20 cubic feet of industrial wood per
acre, per year.
From an increment boring, determine the age class of a tree that is
located on the site in question. For example, a 27 year old black spruce
in the 20 year age class must be at least 8 feet tall if the site is to be
considered as being productive.
But sample trees must be
representative of the site. The factors of drainage, soils, elevation, and
exposure must also be considered.
Total height in feet at upper limit of the unproductive site class
BLACK ASH
HEIGHT
RED MAPLE
HEIGHT
20
BLACK
SPRUCE
HEIGHT
8
12
10
CHESTNUT
OAK
HEIGHT
12
30
13
21
17
21
40
19
29
24
29
50
25
34
32
34
60
30
39
37
39
70
33
45
43
45
80
39
50
49
50
90
41
53
53
52
100
43
57
57
56
110
47
60
60
57
120
50
60
61
58
130
51
61
61
59
140
52
62
62
60
150
53
63
62
--
160
--
64
63
--
170
--
65
63
--
180
--
65
63
--
AGE CLASS
213
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
214
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 4
U.S. Tree, Shrubs, & Vine Species Codes
215
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
216
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Trees
Code
Common name
Genus
Species
010
012
016
043
057
068
070
071
090
091
094
095
096
097
100
105
110
123
125
126
128
129
130
131
132
136
202
221
241
261
310
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
330
331
332
341
356
fir spp.
balsam fir
Fraser fir
Atlantic white-cedar
redcedar / juniper spp.
eastern redcedar
larch (introduced)
tamarack (native)
spruce spp.
Norway spruce
white spruce
black spruce
blue spruce
red spruce
pine spp.
jack pine
shortleaf pine
Table Mountain pine
red pine
pitch pine
pond pine
eastern white pine
Scotch pine
loblolly pine
Virginia pine
Austrian pine
Douglas-fir
baldcypress
northern white-cedar
eastern hemlock
maple spp.
boxelder
black maple
striped maple
red maple
silver maple
sugar maple
mountain maple
Norway maple
buckeye, horsechestnut
Ohio buckeye
yellow buckeye
ailanthus
serviceberry
Abies
A.
A.
Chamaecyparis
Juniperus
J.
Larix
L.
Picea
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
Pinus
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
Pseudotsuga
Taxodium
Thuja
Tsuga
Acer
A.
A.
A.
A.
A.
A.
A.
A.
Aesculus
A.
Aesculus
Ailanthus
Amelanchier
spp.
balsamea
217
thyoides
spp.
virginiana
sp.
laricina
spp.
abies
glauca
mariana
pungens
rubens
spp.
banksiana
echinata
pungens
resinosa
rigida
serotina
strobus
sylvestris
taeda
virginiana
nigra
menziesii
distichum
occidentalis
canadensis
spp.
negundo
nigrum
pensylvanicum
rubrum
saccharinum
saccharum
spicatum
platanoides
spp.
glabra
octandra
altissima
spp.
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Common name
Genus
Species
367
370
371
372
373
375
379
391
pawpaw
birch spp.
yellow birch
sweet birch
river birch
paper birch
gray birch
American hornbeam,
musclewood
hickory spp.
bitternut hickory
pignut hickory
pecan
shellbark hickory
shagbark hickory
mockernut hickory
American chestnut
catalpa spp.
northern catalpa
hackberry spp.
sugarberry
hackberry
eastern redbud
yellowwood
flowering dogwood
hawthorn
common persimmon
American beech
ash spp.
white ash
black ash
green ash
pumpkin ash
blue ash
honeylocust
Kentucky coffeetree
American holly
walnut spp.
butternut
black walnut
sweetgum
yellow-poplar
Osage-orange
magnolia spp.
cucumbertree
sweetbay
Asimina
Betula
B.
B.
B.
B.
B.
Carpinus
triloba
spp.
alleghaniensis
lenta
nigra
papyrifera
populifolia
caroliniana
Carya
C.
C.
C.
C.
C.
C.
Castanea
Catalpa
C.
Celtis
C.
C.
Cercis
Cladrastis
Cornus
Crataegus
Diospyros
Fagus
Fraxinus
F.
F.
F.
F.
F.
Gleditsia
Gymnocladus
Ilex
Juglans
J.
J.
Liquidambar
Liriodendron
Maclura
Magnolia
M.
M.
spp.
cordiformis
glabra
illinoensis
laciniosa
ovata
tomentosa
dentata
spp.
speciosa
spp.
laevigata
occidentalis
canadensis
lutea
florida
spp.
virginiana
grandifolia
spp.
americana
nigra
pennsylvanica
profunda
quadrangulata
triacanthos
dioicus
opaca
spp.
cinerea
nigra
styraciflua
tulipifera
pomifera
spp.
acuminata
virginiana
400
402
403
404
405
407
409
421
450
452
460
461
462
471
481
491
500
521
531
540
541
543
544
545
546
552
571
591
600
601
602
611
621
641
650
651
653
218
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Common name
Genus
Species
655
660
680
681
682
693
694
Mountain magnolia
apple spp.
mulberry spp.
white mulberry
red mulberry
blackgum
swamp tupelo
M.
Malus
Morus
M.
M.
Nyssa
N.
701
eastern hophornbeam,
ironwood
sourwood
Paulownia, Empress
tree
sycamore
cottonwood and
poplar spp.
balsam poplar
eastern cottonwood
bigtooth aspen
swamp cottonwood
quaking aspen
cherry, plum spp.
pin cherry
black cherry
chokecherry
oak spp.
white oak
swamp white oak
scarlet oak
northern pin oak
southern red oak
Ostrya
fraseri
spp.
spp.
alba
rubra
sylvatica
sylvatica var.
biflora
virginiana
Oxydendrum
Paulownia
arboreum
tomentosa
Platanus
Populus
occidentalis
spp.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
Prunus
P.
P.
P.
Quercus
Q.
Q.
Q.
Q.
Q.
balsamifera
deltoides
grandidentata
heterophylla
tremuloides
spp.
pensylvanica
serotina
virginiana
spp.
alba
bicolor
coccinea
ellipsoidalis
falcata
var. falcata
falcata var.
pagodifolia
ilicifolia
imbricaria
laurifolia
lyrata
macrocarpa
marilandica
michauxii
muehlenbergii
nigra
palustris
phellos
prinus
rubra
711
712
731
740
741
742
743
744
746
760
761
762
763
800
802
804
806
809
812
813
816
817
820
822
823
824
825
826
827
830
831
832
833
cherrybark oak
(swamp red oak)
bear oak, scrub oak
shingle oak
laurel oak
overcup oak
bur oak
blackjack oak
swamp chestnut oak
chinkapin oak
water oak
pin oak
willow oak
chestnut oak
northern red oak
Q.
Q.
Q.
Q.
Q.
Q.
Q.
Q.
Q.
Quercus
Q.
Q.
Q.
Q.
219
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Common name
Genus
Species
834
835
837
901
920
922
931
935
936
950
951
952
970
971
972
975
977
999
Shumard oak
post oak
black oak
black locust
willow spp.
black willow
sassafras
American mountain-ash
European mountain-ash
basswood spp.
American basswood
white basswood
elm spp.
winged elm
American elm
slippery elm
rock elm
unknown or not listed
Q.
Q.
Q.
Robinia
Salix
S.
Sassafras
Sorbus
S.
Tilia
Tilia
T.
Ulmus
U.
U.
U.
U.
shumardii
stellata
velutina
psuedoacacia
spp.
nigra
albidum
americana
aucuparia
spp.
americana
heterophylla
spp.
alata
americana
rubra
thomasii
Deciduous Shrubs
Code
Common name
Genus
Species
350
352
353
365
366
368
381
458
465
475
485
492
493
alder
speckled alder
Hercules club
chokeberry sp.
azalea
barberry
buttonbush
New Jersey tea
sweet pepperbush
fringetree
sweetfern
alternate-leaved dogwood
silky dogwood
Alnus
A.
Aralia
Aronia
Azalea
Berberis
Cephalanthus
Cleanothus
Clethra
Chionanthus
Comptonia
Cornus
C.
494
round-leaved dogwood
C.
sp.
rugosa
spinosa
sp.
sp.
sp.
occidentalis
americanus
alnifolia
virginicus
peregrina
alternifolia
amomum
(obliqua)
rugosa (circinata)
496
gray-stemmed, or
panicled dogwood
red-osier dogwood
American hazelnut
beaked hazelnut
Cornus
497
501
502
C.
Corylus
C.
220
racemosa
(paniculata)
stolonifera
americana
cornuta (rostrata)
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Code
Common name
Genus
Species
525
535
Dirca
Elaeagnus
palustris
angustifolia
549
585
592
leatherwood
autumn olive, or Russian
olive
huckleberry
witch-hazel
large-leaf holly
Gaylussacia
Hamamelis
Ilex
593
604
609
635
637
643
644
685
725
845
856
864
865
866
868
870
905
915
925
926
923
929
937
982
983
985
986
987
988
989
990
991
992
994
997
winterberry holly
fetter-bush
common spicebush
bush honeysuckle
male-berry, staggerbush
sweet gale
bayberry
mountain-holly
ninebark
buckthorn
azalea (deciduous)
winged sumac
smooth sumac
staghorn sumac
poison sumac
currant, gooseberry
rose
briar, bramble, dewberry
American elderberry
red-berried elderberry
crack willow
other shrub willows
spirea
American bladdernut
blueberry
viburnum
maple-leaved viburnum
hobblebush viburnum
wild raisin, withe-rod
arrowwood
nannyberry
blackhaw
highbush cranberry
common prickly-ash
unknown or not listed
sp.
virginiana
montana
(monticola)
verticillata
sp.
benzoin
sp.
sp.
gale
pensylvanica
mucronatus
opulifolius
sp.
sp.
copallina
glabra
typhina
vernix
sp.
sp.
sp.
canadensis
racemosa
fragilis
sp.
sp.
trifolia
sp.
sp.
acerifolium
alnifolium
cassinoides
dentatum
lentago
prunifolium
trilobum
americanum
Ilex
Leucothoe
Lindera
Lonicera
Lyonia
Myrica
Myrica
Nemopanthus
Physocarpus
Rhamnus
Rhododendron
Rhus
R.
R.
R.
Ribes
Rosa
Rubus
Sambucus
S.
Salix
Salix
Spirea
Staphylea
Vaccinium
Viburnum
V.
V.
V.
V.
V.
V.
V.
Zanthoxylum
221
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Evergreen Shrubs
Code
Common Name
Genus
Species
045
061
232
357
605
606
607
608
642
855
945
998
leatherleaf
common juniper
Canada yew
bog rosemary
sheep laurel
mountain laurel
swamp laurel
Labrador tea
wax myrtle
rhododendron
sweetleaf
unknown or not listed
Chamaedaphne
Juniperus
Taxus
Andromeda
Kalmia
K.
K.
Ledum
Myrica
Rhododendron
Symplocos
calyculata
communis
canadensis
glaucophylla
angustifolia
latifolia
polifolia
groenlandicum
cerifera
sp.
tinctoria
Dwarf Shrubs
Code
Common Name
Genus
Species
363
364
441
442
bearberry
alpine bearberry
striped pipsissewa
pipsissewa
Arctostaphylos
Arctous
Chimaphila
Chimaphila
498
547
548
603
615
bunchberry
creeping snowberry
teaberry
diapensia
twinflower
Cornus
Chiogenes
Gaultheria
Diapensia
Linnaea
618
675
677
981
996
alpine azalea
partridgeberry
three-toothed cinquefoil
cranberry
unknown or not listed
Loiseleuria
Mitchella
Potentilla
Vaccinium
uva-ursi
alpinus
maculata
unbellata
cisatlantica
canadensis
hispidula
procumbens
lapponica
borealis
americana
procumbens
repens
tridentata
sp.
222
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Vines
Code
Common Name
Genus
Species
451
454
455
477
636
715
867
934
993
995
hog peanut
ground-nut
American bittersweet
clematis sp.
vine honeysuckle
Virginia creeper
poison ivy
greenbrier
grape
unknown or not listed
Amphicarpa
Apois
Celastrus
Clematis
Lonicera
Parthenocissus
Rhus
Smilax
Vitis
bracteata
americana
scandens
sp.
sp.
quinquefolia
radicans
sp.
sp.
223
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
224
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 5
Specific Tally Procedures
225
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
226
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Specific Tally Procedures
Special rules and exceptions
For most plots, the examples in Appendix 11 indicate which items on the
tally form require entries. However, there are exceptions:
Omit item 2.181 (sketch map of plot location) for nonforest plots
(plots with land use codes 61 through 92) that do not contain
portions of forested ecotypes, unless there are indications that the
plot area may revert to forest land within the next 5 to 6 years. The
course need not be traversed unless it is necessary to locate a plot
precisely in order to determine the correct land use.
Occasionally it will not be possible to establish a specified sample
plot and an alternate plot will be needed. When this happens,
promptly notify your supervisor. If an alternate plot is established,
make sure that the original plot sheets and photos are firmly
attached to the tally sheets for the alternate plot, and that all field
copies of the plot listings for that county are updated to show the
change.
Sample plots are not intentionally established to check census
water. If a plot is determined to be census water (land use code 91)
due to some change since the previous inventory, enter that land
use code in item 6. Under general notes, specifically identify the
river, lake, or body of water.
Do not scribe trees on land that has been assigned a land use
code of 50 (productive reserved forest land), unless granted
permission. Lacking such permission, witness the SP, line trees,
and PC with other features or landmarks.
Collect the same data items for plots classified as land use 51
(Christmas tree plantations) as is collected for nonforest plots. The
tree species used in the plantation must be noted in the general
notes section on page four of the tally record.
227
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Regular Tally Procedures
Tree Tally ⎯
During this inventory, the trees that fall on subplot 1 are the only trees
that will be reconciled to previous inventories.
On subplot 1, only trees 5 inches DBH and greater within the 24.0 foot
subplot radius will be tallied as part of the regular tally procedure. All
trees that are further than 24.0 feet away from subplot center will be
ignored, even if they were tally trees at the last occasion.
Likewise, on remeasured plots, only trees 5 inches DBH and greater
within the 24.0 foot radius of subplot 1, will be tallied, or reconciled, as
part of the regular tally procedure.
Leaning trees are determined to be "in" or "out" of the plot radius by
measuring the horizontal distance from plot center, to the center of the
tree at the base. The direction that the tree leans is of no consequence.
Standing dead trees and snags are determined to be "in" or "out" on the
same basis as live trees. Dead and down, and windthrown trees are
determined "in" or "out" on the basis of where their DBH would have
been if the tree was still standing. Thus, it is necessary to mentally
upright the tree in its original position; i.e., limiting distance is measured
to the center of the stump, or ground cavity.
When two or more trees are on the same azimuth begin by tallying the
tree that is closest to plot center and proceed to the tree that is farthest
away. Follow the same relative procedure with saplings on the four
microplots.
Reconciling the previous tally⎯
All subplots on Sample Kind 1 plots, and sub-plots 2, 3, and 4 of Sample
Kinds 2 and 3 plots are all being established for the first time during this
inventory. Reconciliation is only required on subplot 1 of remeasured
plots (sample kinds 6 and 7).
Examples:
1.
The first tree to be tallied at subplot 1 is now an ingrowth,
dead ingrowth, or previously missed tree. Assign the first
available tree number and record the appropriate current
data. If there were 35 trees on this subplot the last time,
assign this tree number 036. The tree will have no data in
items 6.330 and 6.340.
228
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
The next tree tallied was tree number 001 at the last
inventory. Since trees are no longer being renumbered each
inventory, previous tally tree number 001 is current tree
number 001. Record the appropriate current data and enter
the appropriate data in items 6.330 and 6.340.
2.
The first tree on the old tally record was a 24 inch DBH sugar
maple, followed by an 8 inch DBH beech. The beech is
present and is the first live tree starting from an azimuth of
001. There is no evidence of the sugar maple. Check the
area to the plot radius limit to see if there is a stump of the
maple. Perhaps there is -- perhaps not. The maple was,
and still is, tree number. 001. Its DBH (Item 6.150) is the
DBH from the previous tally sheet. Copy the appropriate
data from the old tally form to items 6.330 and 6.340. Assign
the proper history code in Item 6.140. The beech tree is tree
number 002.
The foregoing examples are common, simple situations. A correct
reconciliation may be time demanding and complex. However, this
is a critical part of the inventory. Training will be provided. Crews
are to direct any questions to supervisors as soon as possible.
On remeasure plots that were previously classified as nonforest, if PC is
still nonforest, record any boundaries and tally trees > 5 inches DBH on
any forested ecotypes within 24 feet. Give all trees a tree history of 22.
Do not tally trees beyond 24 feet.
Previous Tree History Codes⎯
On remeasure, reconcile trees that have history codes that indicate they
were survivors or ingrowth. In addition, trees that were assigned a tree
history code of 24, 25, 31, 40, or 43 must now be assigned a new tree
history code of 53 or 54, depending on whether or not they are still
present. The codes that indicate these trees are highlighted below.
Note: The following are old history codes. They are provided here to
serve as an aid in the reconciliation process. There are significant
differences between these codes and the current tree history codes.
These codes should never be used during the current inventory.
229
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Also note that the tree history codes used during the previous inventory
differ slightly from history codes that we currently use. If the plot has a
computer generated reconciliation form, use it to reconcile the tally on
the plot. The codes shown on the computer generated reconciliation
form have been adjusted to align with the old tree history codes with our
current codes. If a reconciliation form is not available, use the tally
sheets or tally printout from the last occasion to reconcile the tally. In
those situations when it becomes necessary to refer to the old tally
sheets, remember that there may be some minor differences in the
history codes.
PREVIOUS TREE HISTORY CODES
FOR
MAINE AND PENNSYLVANIA
Survivors
-- Live, previously measured or missed trees that are
currently within the boundaries of a subplot.
Code
Definition
10
same live tree -- was in before, is in now
11
multiple stemmed tree -- the product of two previously
measured trees that have grown together and are now treated
as one tree (used in conjunction with codes 13 and 14)
12
tree was missed at last survey -- should have been tallied but
wasn't, is now tallied
13
multiple stemmed tree -- the first of two previously measured
tree that grew together, treated as one now
14
multiple stemmed tree -- the second of two previously
measured trees that grew together, treated as one now
19
trees that are alive, but were incorrectly tallied as dead at the
last occasion – MAINE only
Ingrowth -- Trees that are correctly being tallied for the first time.
20
live trees, not previously measured
21
live or dead tree, was tallied before but should not have been,
is a tally tree now
230
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
22
live or dead tree, was on nonforest land, now on timberland
(implies land use change)
23
live or dead tree, was on unproductive, reserved or urban
forest land, now on timberland
24
dead tree or snag, too small to tally before but has grown to
tally size and died since the previous inventory, is a tally tree
now
25
dead tree, should have been tallied, was missed, has since
died, and is now tallied
27
live or dead tree, was tallied as a sapling on the last occasion,
is greater than five inches DBH now – PENNSYLVANIA only
29
live or dead tree, on sample kind 2 plot, that is located between
the 49.0’ (1/6 acre) and 52.7’ (acre) radii – MAINE only
Code
Removals -- Previously tallied trees that:
(a) have been harvested, killed or presumed to have been
harvested during a cultural operation (logging, land clearing,
TSI work, etc.)
or
(b) are no longer on timberland.
30
the location where the tree is, or was, is still forested; the tree
has been killed, it can be standing or down
31*
the location where the tree was is still forested, the tree has
been removed (usually, a stump will be present)
32
the location where the tree is, or was, is now nonforest, the tree
is alive, killed, or removed (if no longer alive, it is assumed that
the cause of death is not natural mortality). If the tree is no
longer present, use the old DBH, distance and azimuth.
33
the location where the tree is, or was, is now unproductive,
reserved, or urban forest land. The tree is alive, or has been
killed, but is still present (if no longer alive, it is assumed that
the cause of death is not natural mortality).
34*
the location where the tree is, or was, is now unproductive,
reserved, or urban forest land -- the tree has been removed
and is no longer present – MAINE only
231
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Mortality
-- Previously tallied trees that have died since the last
inventory.
40
dead tree -- standing or down -- tree is still present; when DBH
measurement is not possible, or current DBH is smaller than
the previous DBH, use previous DBH for current
41*
dead, down, disintegrated, no evidence remaining; previously
measured trees that have died and are in advanced stages of
decay, or any previously measured tree that cannot be
accounted for
42
dead tree, standing or down, now located on nonforest
land
43
dead tree, standing or down, now located on unproductive,
reserved, or urban forest land
44*
dead, down, disintegrated, no evidence remaining; the land
where it was is unproductive, reserved, or urban forest –
MAINE only
Code
Other Trees
50*
tree that was tallied before, but should not have been (was
out), is still out this time, not tallied now
51*
dead tree or snag at the previous occasion, is a snag now; tree
was not a tally tree at the last occasion because dead trees
and snags were not tallied then, tree definitely was not
“missed” at the last occasion (check code 25).
–
PENNSYLVANIA only
53*
trees with a previous tree history of 22, 31, 40, that are still
present (standing) – MAINE only
54*
trees with a previous tree history of 22, 31, 40, that are no
longer present (down, or no evidence of the tree remains) –
MAINE only
55*
trees that were tallied as being within the 49.0 ft. plot radius
last time, and are now accurately measured as being beyond
49.0 ft. this time. – MAINE only
232
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
70
trees that were properly tallied at the last occasion but were not
included on the electronic history files due to a keypunching
error. – MAINE only
* Trees with these previous history codes are not reconciled.
Previous Trees That Are Not On The History File
Occasionally the history files used in the data recorder program are
incorrect. These errors must be detected and corrected. To do so, all
remeasured plots must be reconciled to the printed or handwritten tally
records from the last occasion. The history files that are transferred to
the data recorder cannot be relied upon to be complete. A check of the
current tally against the previous tally must be completed for each plot.
If a tree that was tallied correctly at the last occasion but is not
contained in the plot history file is discovered, enter the previous tree
number that is on the plot print out and assign the appropriate tree
history. You will also need to enter the previous diameter and previous
tree class / merchability class. This information is also on the plot print
out.
233
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
234
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 6
Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification
235
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
236
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Determination of Stocking Values for Land Use Classification
Stocking values are required to determine if a CONDITION STATUS = 1
(accessible forest land) exists on a plot. This will determine which data
items must be recorded for the condition. When the CONDITION
STATUS is in question, (usually a nonforest area that is in the process
of reverting to forest land or a marginal site that can only support a low
number of trees) the crew must determine if there is sufficient stocking
to classify the condition as forest. A minimum stocking value of 10% is
required for accessible forestland (unless the condition was previously
forested, such as a recent clear cut).
The following tables show the number of trees per acre needed to
achieve this minimum stocking value. In the determination of stocking
for this purpose the field crew should consider the condition over its
entire area, not just the trees and seedlings that would be tallied on the
subplots and microplots, especially when the condition straddles the
plot. Also, for stocking purposes only consider a clump of trees (e.g.,
stump sprouts) less than 5 in DBH to be a single tree.
The number of trees per acre need to obtain minimum stocking depends
on the DBH of largest tree in the condition (not necessarily a tally tree)
and the forest type of the condition, and the size of the trees. If the
condition occurs on all 4 subplots and the trees are distributed fairly
evenly over the entire condition area, the following steps can be used to
determine if the condition has the minimum number of trees per acre for
forest land:
Observe the diameter of the largest tree on the condition and
classify the condition into one of the following groups, 5+, 4.04.9, 3.0-3.9, 2.0-2.9, 1.0-1.9 and < 1.0 in DBH classes. If a 5inch or larger tree is present, Table A6b will be used, otherwise
use Table A6a.
Determine the appropriate forest type of the condition based
on the tree species present in the condition and/or the forest
type of similar conditions in the area. Forest type may be hard
to determine, however if it is determined that the condition is
forest, then a forest type must be assigned to the condition.
Estimate the number of trees per acre by the diameter classes
shown from the appropriate table. When a condition exists on
all 4 of the 24-ft radius subplots each tally tree (DBH > 5.0 in)
represents 6 trees per acre and each sapling (DBH > 1.0 in to
< 5.0 in) or seedling observed on the 4 microplots represents
75 trees per acre.
237
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
In sparse stands of smaller trees, a more accurate observation of trees
per acre can be determined by observing trees < 5.0 in DBH on the 24-ft
radius subplot. In many forest types no more than 180 trees per acre of
the largest diameter class are needed to meet the minimum stocking
requirements, a total of 30 trees on all 4 subplots, 7 or 8 smaller trees
on each subplot will provide minimum stocking.
When trees of more than one diameter class are present, their
contribution towards meeting the minimum must be combined. For
example:
In a lodgepole pine forest type, the largest tree in the condition
is 5.0+ in DBH. If 15 or more 5.0-6.9 in trees are found on the
th
four subplots the minimum of 90 trees per acre (Table A6b, 5
row, 6th column) would be met. In the same condition only
three tally trees in the 13.0-14.9 in DBH class equal the 18
trees per acre in that diameter class. If the tally were three
5.0-6.9 in trees (18/90 = 1/5 the minimum) and two 13.0-14.9 in
DBH class trees (12/18=2/3 the minimum) the combined
stocking does not meet the minimum (1/5 +2/3 < 1) and the
condition would be classified nonforest.
Other things observed on the plot will influence in the determination of
condition status. In the last example, evidence of a recent disturbance
that reduced the stocking (cutting, fire, etc.) should be considered. In
addition, a very uneven distribution of the trees across the condition can
greatly change the observed number of trees per acre on plots installed
across the condition.
If the condition does not cover all four subplots entirely, trees per acre
must be expanded by an expansion factor. The expansion factor is
equal to 400/sum of the percent of subplot area (%ARE) for the
condition. The trees per acre value of every diameter class is multiplied
by this expansion factor.
If the trees are not uniformly distributed throughout the condition or the
condition occurs on only a small portion of the plot, (half the plot or
less), use your best judgment in assigning status. You may place
several additional temporary subplots in the condition in order to get a
larger sample to base stocking on. When additional temporary subplots
or judgment is used to assign land use, a note should be made on the
plot sheet. Use the following procedure to establish these temporary
subplots in a condition:
A.
Consider locations 120.0 ft horizontal distance from the highest
numbered subplot in the condition. First, consider the location
o
0 azimuth from the subplot center. If this location is unsuitable,
consider in order locations at azimuth 120o, and 240o. When a
suitable location has been found, establish the temporary
238
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
subplot. Temporary subplots should be entirely within the
condition (locations should not be within 24.0 ft of a mapped
boundary).
B.
If Step A fails to yield a suitable subplot location, repeat Step A
at each of the next highest numbered regular subplot in the
condition.
C. If Steps A and B have been exhausted and a suitable
temporary subplot still has not been found, repeat Step A at
each temporary subplot in turn, beginning with the first
temporary subplot that was established.
If more than one temporary subplot is to be established, repeat Steps A
and B to establish the second lowest numbered temporary subplot next,
and continue in order until you have enough temporary subplots
established in the condition to get a good, representative estimate of
stocking. The general rule for establishing temporary subplots is:
•
Install the lowest temporary subplot off the highest established
subplot, until all the established subplots have been
exhausted.
•
Then establish the lowest temporary subplot yet to be
established off the lowest one already established (lowest off
highest, then lowest off lowest).
If there is a transition zone between two conditions use your best
judgment to be sure that trees tallied in the transition zone do not have
too much weight in the assignment of a land use.
239
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Table A6a. Number of trees per acre needed for minimum stocking (stocking value 10%) of forestland in conditions with no
trees greater than 5 in DBH.
DBH of largest tree in the condition
4.0-4.9
3.0-3.9
2.0-2.9
1.0-1.9
<1.0
1.01.9
<1.0
3.03.9
2.02.9
1.01.9
<1.0
2.02.9
1.01.9
<1.0
1.01.9
<1.0
<1.0
Forest type
DBH of tally tree
4.03.02.04.9
3.9
2.9
Spruce-fir
120
300
620
120
160
240
490
120
180
370
120
250
120
150
200
Western larch
150
190
260
410
990
160
220
340
800
170
270
600
180
400
200
Black spruce
120
150
190
260
430
110
140
200
340
100
140
260
90
170
90
Jack pine
90
110
150
240
530
90
130
190
420
100
150
320
100
210
110
Lodgepole pine
170
220
290
460
1090
180
250
380
870
190
300
660
200
440
220
Shortleaf pine
120
150
210
330
840
130
170
280
670
140
220
500
150
340
170
Slash pine
110
140
200
320
870
120
170
270
700
140
220
520
150
350
170
W. white pine
200
260
360
560
1350
220
300
460
1080
230
360
810
250
540
270
Long leaf pine
80
100
130
200
400
80
110
160
320
80
120
240
80
160
80
180
240
380
910
150
200
310
730
160
240
550
170
360
180
Ponderosa pine 140
Red pine
120
160
210
330
770
130
180
280
620
140
210
460
150
310
150
Pond pine
80
100
140
220
510
90
120
180
410
90
140
310
100
210
100
E. white pine
110
140
180
280
580
110
150
220
470
110
170
350
110
230
120
Loblolly pine
100
130
180
280
670
110
150
230
530
120
180
400
120
270
130
240
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DBH of largest tree in the condition
4.0-4.9
3.0-3.9
2.0-2.9
1.0-1.9
<1.0
1.01.9
<1.0
3.03.9
2.02.9
1.01.9
<1.0
2.02.9
1.01.9
<1.0
1.01.9
<1.0
<1.0
Forest type
DBH of tally tree
4.03.02.04.9
3.9
2.9
Douglas fir
120
150
200
310
670
120
170
250
540
130
190
400
130
270
130
N. white cedar
140
180
250
400
990
150
210
330
790
170
260
600
180
400
200
Eastern hemlock 120
150
210
360
1110
130
190
310
890
150
250
660
180
440
220
Western hemlock 180
220
300
480
1100
190
250
390
880
200
300
660
210
440
220
Redwood
220
280
380
600
1400
240
320
500
1120
250
380
840
260
560
280
Red maple
90
110
140
220
470
90
120
180
380
90
140
280
90
190
90
Red alder
Maple-beechbirch
70
90
110
170
340
70
90
140
270
70
100
200
70
130
70
80
100
140
230
590
90
120
190
480
100
150
360
110
240
120
Paper birch
80
110
150
240
640
90
130
200
510
100
160
380
110
250
130
Oak-hickory
70
90
120
190
430
80
100
160
350
80
120
260
80
170
90
Black walnut
60
80
110
160
340
70
90
130
270
70
100
210
70
140
70
Sweet gum
130
160
220
360
950
140
190
310
760
150
240
570
170
380
190
Aspen
Cherry-ash-y.
poplar
70
90
120
190
380
70
100
150
300
80
110
230
80
150
80
80
100
130
180
310
80
100
140
250
70
100
190
70
120
60
Basswood
Elm-ashcottonwood
100
120
170
290
840
110
150
250
670
120
200
500
140
330
170
80
100
140
230
600
90
120
190
480
100
150
360
110
240
120
241
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Table A6b. Number of trees per acre needed for minimum stocking (stocking value 10%) of forest land in conditions with at
least one tree 5 in DBH or larger.
Forest type
DBH of tally tree
<1.0
1.0- 2.01.9 2.9
3.03.9
4.04.9
5.06.9
7.08.9
9.0- 11.0- 13.0- 15.0- 17.0- 19.0- 21.0- 23.0- 25.0- 27.010.9 12.9 14.9 16.9 18.9 20.9 22.9 24.9 26.9 28.9 29.0+
Spruce-fir
740
170
140
60
40
27
350
230
20
16
13
10
9
8
7
6
5
5
Western larch
1190
490
310
230
180
80
50
30
21
16
12
10
8
7
6
5
4
4
Black spruce
510
310
220
170
140
70
50
35
29
24
21
18
16
15
13
12
11
10
Jack pine
630
280
180
130
110
50
30
19
14
11
9
7
6
5
4
4
3
3
Lodgepole p.
1310
550
350
250
200
90
50
34
24
18
14
12
10
8
7
6
5
5
Shortleaf pine
1010
390
240
180
140
60
30
22
15
11
9
7
6
5
4
3
3
3
Slash pine
1040
380
230
170
130
60
30
20
13
10
7
6
5
4
3
3
2
2
W. white pine
1620
660
420
300
240
110
60
40
28
21
17
13
11
9
8
7
6
5
Long leaf pine
480
240
160
120
90
40
30
19
14
11
9
7
6
5
5
4
4
3
Ponderosa p.
1090
450
280
210
160
70
40
27
19
14
11
9
7
6
5
5
4
4
Red pine
930
400
250
180
150
70
40
25
18
14
11
9
7
6
5
5
4
4
Pond pine
620
260
170
120
100
40
30
17
12
9
7
6
5
4
3
3
3
2
E. white pine
700
330
220
160
130
60
40
24
18
14
11
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
Loblolly pine
800
330
210
150
120
60
30
20
14
11
8
7
6
5
4
3
3
3
242
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Forest type
DBH of tally tree
<1.0
1.0- 2.01.9 2.9
3.03.9
4.04.9
5.06.9
7.08.9
9.0- 11.0- 13.0- 15.0- 17.0- 19.0- 21.0- 23.0- 25.0- 27.010.9 12.9 14.9 16.9 18.9 20.9 22.9 24.9 26.9 28.9 29.0+
Douglas fir
800
180
140
70
40
27
370
240
19
15
12
10
8
7
6
5
5
4
N. white ced.
1190
470
290
210
170
80
40
27
19
14
11
8
7
6
5
4
4
3
E. hemlock
1330
420
250
180
140
60
30
19
12
9
6
5
4
3
3
2
2
2
W. hemlock
1320
560
360
260
210
100
50
36
26
19
15
12
10
9
7
7
6
5
Redwood
1680
710
450
330
260
120
70
45
32
24
19
15
13
11
9
8
7
6
Red maple
560
260
170
130
100
50
30
19
14
11
9
7
6
5
4
4
4
3
Red alder
400
200
130
100
80
40
20
16
12
10
8
7
6
5
4
4
3
3
Map.-beech-bir.
710
270
170
120
90
40
20
15
10
7
6
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
Paper birch
760
280
170
130
100
50
20
15
10
7
6
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
Oak-hickory
520
230
150
110
80
40
20
15
11
8
7
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
Black walnut
410
190
130
90
80
30
20
14
11
8
7
6
5
4
4
3
3
2
Sweet gum
1150
430
260
190
150
70
40
23
16
12
9
7
6
5
4
3
3
3
Aspen
460
220
150
110
90
40
20
17
13
10
8
7
6
5
4
4
3
3
Cher.-ash-y. p.
370
220
150
120
100
40
30
23
18
15
13
11
10
9
8
7
7
6
Basswood
1000
340
200
150
110
50
30
16
11
8
6
4
4
3
2
2
2
2
Elm-ash-ctwd.
720
270
170
120
90
40
20
15
10
7
6
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
243
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Figure 6 -- Here the dark shaded area is trees, surrounded by a
treeless area or an area with only scattered trees. It could be a forest
island surrounded by marsh/bog, a wooded draw in a grazed area, or a
farm woodlot that is invading an abandoned field. Between the forest
and the nonforest is a transition zone that is about 40 to 80 ft wide.
Because there is a transition zone, not an abrupt forest/nonforest
edge, no mapping is done. Subplots 1 and 3 are recorded as 100% in
condition 1 and subplots 2 and 4 are put in condition 2. To determine
the stocking in condition 2 you could exclude subplot 2 because it is in
a transition zone. If needed, several temporary subplots could be
installed off subplot 4 to have an adequate sample for determining the
stocking of condition 2. Similarly, to get a stocking for condition 1,
subplot 1 would be excluded and, if needed, several temporary
subplots could be installed off subplot 3.
244
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
DETERMINING IF MINIMUM STOCKING LEVEL (10%) IS MET
The following simplified instructions and associated tables apply to the
northeastern states.
Installing Stocking Subplots
If it is unclear if a particular condition will meet the minimum stocking
level required for Accessible Forest Land, the following procedures will
be used to determine the stocking level.
1.
To determine if minimum stocking is reached, the crew shall
sample all live trees on each of the four 1/24 acre subplots
(tree tally), and the four 1/300 acre reproduction plots located
12 ft east of the subplot centers. This sample may consist of
any combination of normal subplots and/or temporary subplots,
provided all subplots fall entirely in the area in question.
2.
The crew shall install temporary subplots as necessary to yield
four 1/24 acre sample areas.
3.
a.
Begin by locating the temporary subplots off the
highest numbered regular subplot that falls in the
condition in question. The temporary subplots shall
be located in the following order: 1) 120 ft at 360
degrees, 2) 120 ft at 120 degrees, then 3) 120 ft at
240 degrees.
b.
If this fails to yield 4 subplots that fall entirely within
the condition, install the remaining temporary subplots
off the next highest numbered regular subplot that
falls in the condition in question.
c.
If this fails to produce a suitable location, rotate the
temporary subplot off the other temporary subplots in
the order they were established until 4 subplots have
been located in the condition.
If at any time, the tally indicates that minimum stocking levels
have been met, do not install the remaining temporary
subplots.
245
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Tallying Stocking Subplots
Once the stocking subplots have been established, the following
specific tally procedures for shall be used. (Note: For stocking
purposes only, stump sprouts are counted as 1.)
1.
Determine the forest type of the area in question.
2.
Determine if there are any trees (5-in DBH or greater) in
the condition. If there are, table A6b-2 will be used to
determine stocking levels.
3.
If there are no 5-in DBH trees in the condition, table A6a-2
will be used. Then Determine diameter of the largest
sapling in the condition. This will determine which column
will be used in table A6a-2. If no saplings are present, use
the column for diameters of <1.0-in.
4.
Begin tallying all live trees on the subplots and microplots
according to the diameter classes in table A6a-2 or A6b-2.
All species are weighted evenly for a given forest type.
5.
For each diameter class, total the stocking values for each
stem in the table for the forest type of the condition in
question. If your tally reaches the 10% stocking level, you
need not continue.
The following example shows how the procedure would work for a given
situation.
246
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
247
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Table A6a-2. Percent stocking value for each stem tallied on four 1/300 acre regeneration plots on forest land in
conditions with no trees 5" DBH or greater.
4.0-4.9
Forest type
Spruce-fir
Black spruce
Jack pine
Red pine
E. white pine
Loblolly pine
Douglas fir
N. white cedar
Eastern hemlock
Red maple
Red alder
Maple-beech-birch
Paper birch
Oak-hickory
Black walnut
Sweet gum
Aspen
Cherry-ash-y. poplar
Basswood
Elm-ash-cottonwood
4.04.9
6.3
6.3
8.3
6.3
6.8
7.5
6.3
5.4
6.3
8.3
10.7
9.4
9.4
10.7
12.5
5.8
10.7
9.4
7.5
9.4
3.03.9
5.0
5.0
6.8
4.7
5.4
5.8
5.0
4.2
5.0
6.8
8.3
7.5
6.8
8.3
9.4
4.7
8.3
7.5
6.3
7.5
2.02.9
3.8
3.9
5.0
3.6
4.2
4.2
3.8
3.0
3.6
5.4
6.8
5.4
5.0
6.3
6.8
3.4
6.3
5.8
4.4
5.4
1.01.9
2.5
2.9
3.1
2.3
2.7
2.7
2.4
1.9
2.1
3.4
4.4
3.3
3.1
3.9
4.7
2.1
3.9
4.2
2.6
3.3
DBH of largest tree in the condition
3.0-3.9
2.0-2.9
DBH of tally tree
3.0- 2.0- 1.02.0- 1.0<1.0 3.9 2.9 1.9 <1.0 2.9 1.9 <1.0
1.2 6.3 4.7 3.1 1.5 6.3 4.2 2.0
1.7 6.8 5.4 3.8 2.2 7.5 5.4 2.9
1.4 8.3 5.8 3.9 1.8 7.5 5.0 2.3
1.0 5.8 4.2 2.7 1.2 5.4 3.6 1.6
1.3 6.8 5.0 3.4 1.6 6.8 4.4 2.1
1.1 6.8 5.0 3.3 1.4 6.3 4.2 1.9
1.1 6.3 4.4 3.0 1.4 5.8 3.9 1.9
0.8 5.0 3.6 2.3 0.9 4.4 2.9 1.3
0.7 5.8 3.9 2.4 0.8 5.0 3.0 1.1
1.6 8.3 6.3 4.2 2.0 8.3 5.4 2.7
2.2 10.7 8.3 5.4 2.8 10.7 7.5 3.8
1.3 8.3 6.3 3.9 1.6 7.5 5.0 2.1
1.2 8.3 5.8 3.8 1.5 7.5 4.7 2.0
1.7 9.4 7.5 4.7 2.1 9.4 6.3 2.9
2.2 10.7 8.3 5.8 2.8 10.7 7.5 3.6
0.8 5.4 3.9 2.4 1.0 5.0 3.1 1.3
2.0 10.7 7.5 5.0 2.5 9.4 6.8 3.3
2.4 9.4 7.5 5.4 3.0 10.7 7.5 3.9
0.9 6.8 5.0 3.0 1.1 6.3 3.8 1.5
1.3 8.3 6.3 3.9 1.6 7.5 5.0 2.1
248
1.0-1.9
<1.0
1.01.9 <1.0 <1.0
6.3 3.0 6.3
8.3 4.4 8.3
7.5 3.6 6.8
5.0 2.4 5.0
6.8 3.3 6.3
6.3 2.8 5.8
5.8 2.8 5.8
4.2 1.9 3.8
4.2 1.7 3.4
8.3 3.9 8.3
10.7 5.8 10.7
6.8 3.1 6.3
6.8 3.0 5.8
9.4 4.4 8.3
10.7 5.4 10.7
4.4 2.0 3.9
9.4 5.0 9.4
10.7 6.3 12.5
5.4 2.3 4.4
6.8 3.1 6.3
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Table A6b-2. Percent stocking values for each stem tallied on four 1/300 acre regeneration plots and four 1/24 acre tree tally plots in
conditions with a tree 5" DBH or larger.
SEED/SAP DBH
1.0- 2.0- 3.0- 4.0Forest type <1.0 1.9 2.9 3.9 4.9
Spruce-fir
1.0 2.1 3.3 4.4 5.4
Black spruce
1.5 2.4 3.4 4.4 5.4
Jack pine
1.2 2.7 4.2 5.8 6.8
Red pine
0.8 1.9 3.0 4.2 5.0
E. white pine
1.1 2.3 3.4 4.7 5.8
Loblolly pine
0.9 2.3 3.6 5.0 6.3
Douglas fir
0.9 2.0 3.1 4.2 5.4
N. white ced.
0.6 1.6 2.6 3.6 4.4
E. hemlock
0.6 1.8 3.0 4.2 5.4
Red maple
1.3 2.9 4.4 5.8 7.5
Red alder
1.9 3.8 5.8 7.5 9.4
Map.-beech-bir. 1.1 2.8 4.4 6.3 8.3
Paper birch
1.0 2.7 4.4 5.8 7.5
Oak-hickory
1.4 3.3 5.0 6.8 9.4
Black walnut
1.8 3.9 5.8 8.3 9.4
Sweet gum
0.7 1.7 2.9 3.9 5.0
Aspen
1.6 3.4 5.0 6.8 8.3
Cher.-ash-y. p. 2.0 3.4 5.0 6.3 7.5
Basswood
0.8 2.2 3.8 5.0 6.8
Elm-ash-ctwd. 1.0 2.8 4.4 6.3 8.3
5.06.9
1.0
0.9
1.2
0.9
1.0
1.0
0.9
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.5
1.5
1.2
1.5
2.0
0.9
1.5
1.5
1.2
1.5
7.08.9
1.5
1.2
2.0
1.5
1.5
2.0
1.5
1.5
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
1.5
3.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
9.010.9
2.2
1.7
3.2
2.4
2.5
3.0
2.2
2.2
3.2
3.2
3.8
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.3
2.6
3.5
2.6
3.8
4.0
11.012.9
3.0
2.1
4.3
3.3
3.3
4.3
3.2
3.2
5.0
4.3
5.0
6.0
6.0
5.5
5.5
3.8
4.6
3.3
5.5
6.0
249
TREE DBH
13.0- 15.0- 17.0- 19.0- 21.0- 23.0- 25.0- 27.014.9
16.9 18.9 20.9 22.9 24.9 26.9 28.9 29.0+
3.8
4.6 6.0 6.7 7.5 8.6 10.0 12.0 12.0
2.5
2.9 3.3 3.8 4.0 4.6 5.0 5.5 6.0
5.5
6.7 8.6 10.0 12.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0
4.3
5.5 6.7 8.6 10.0 12.0 12.0 15.0 15.0
4.3
5.5 6.7 7.5 8.6 10.0 12.0 12.0 15.0
5.5
7.5 8.6 10.0 12.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
4.0
5.0 6.0 7.5 8.6 10.0 12.0 12.0 15.0
4.3
5.5 7.5 8.6 10.0 12.0 15.0 15.0 20.0
6.7
10.0 12.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 30.0 30.0 30.0
5.5
6.7 8.6 10.0 12.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 20.0
6.0
7.5 8.6 10.0 12.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0
8.6
10.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 30.0 30.0 30.0
8.6
10.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 30.0 30.0 30.0
7.5
8.6 12.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 30.0 30.0
7.5
8.6 10.0 12.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 30.0
5.0
6.7 8.6 10.0 12.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 20.0
6.0
7.5 8.6 10.0 12.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0
4.0
4.6 5.5 6.0 6.7 7.5 8.6 8.6 10.0
7.5
10.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0
8.6
10.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 30.0 30.0 30.0
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
250
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 7
Glossary
251
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
252
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Accessible Forest Land -- Land that is within sampled area (the
population of interest), is accessible and can safely be visited, and
meets at least one of the two following criteria:
(a) the condition is at least 10-percent stocked by trees of any size
(appendix 3) or has been at least 10-percent stocked in the
past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to nonforest
use(s) that prevent normal tree regeneration and succession
such as regular mowing, grazing, or recreation activities,
or
b)
in several western woodland types where stocking cannot be
determined, and the condition has at least 5 percent crown
cover by trees of any size, or has had at least 5 percent cover
in the past. Additionally, the condition is not subject to a
nonforest use that prevents normal regeneration and
succession, such as regular mowing, grazing, or recreation
activities.
ACTUAL LENGTH -- For trees with broken or missing tops. The actual
length of the tree is recorded to the nearest 1.0 ft from ground level to
the highest remaining portion of the tree still present and attached to the
bole. If the top is intact, this item may be omitted. Forked trees should
be treated the same as unforked trees.
Agricultural Land -- Land managed for crops, pasture, or other
agricultural use. Evidence includes geometric field and road patterns,
fencing and the traces produced by livestock or mechanized equipment.
The area must be at least 1.0 ac in size and 120.0 ft. wide at the point of
occurrence.
Annular Plot -- A circular, fixed area plot with a radius of 59.0 feet.
Annular plots may be used for sample intensification or for sampling
relatively rare events.
ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION SPECIES -- Indicates the predominant
species that is planted or seeded in an artificially regenerated condition.
Bole -- The main stem of a tree, extending from one foot above the
ground to the point on the tree where DOB reaches 4 inches.
Boundary -- The intersection of two or more conditions on a subplot or
microplot. Each boundary is described by recording the azimuth and
horizontal distance from the subplot or microplot center to the left and
right points of where the boundary intersects the perimeter of the
subplot or microplot. An azimuth and distance to a corner point may
also be described, if one exists. If multiple boundaries exist at a
253
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
subplot, they are recorded in the order of their occurrence on the
subplot, starting from north and proceeding around the compass.
Census Water -- Rivers and streams that are more than 200 feet wide
and bodies of water that are greater than 4.5 acres in size.
CONDITION CLASS -- The combination of discrete landscape and
forest attributes that identify and define different strata on the plot.
Examples of such attributes include condition status, forest type, stand
origin, stand size, owner group, reserve status and stand density.
Cropland -- Land under cultivation within the past 24 months, including
orchards and land in soil improving crops, but excluding land cultivated
in developing improved pasture.
CROWN CLASS -- A classification of trees based on dominance in
relation to adjacent trees within the stand as indicated by crown
development and the amount of sunlight received from above and sides.
CUBIC-FOOT CULL -- An assessment of the rotten, missing, or
otherwise defective portions of a tree bole that are unsuitable for
industrial wood products. Cubic-foot cull is expressed as a percentage
of the entire bole.
Cull -- Portions of a tree that are unusable for industrial wood products
because of rot, form, or other defect. (See cubic-foot cull.)
Diameter at Breast Height (DBH) -- The diameter of the bole of a tree
at breast height (4.5 feet above the ground), measured outside of the
bark.
Diameter at Root Collar (DRC) -- The diameter of a tree measured at
the ground line or stem root collar, measured outside of the bark.
Diameter Outside Bark (DOB) -- A diameter that may be taken at
various points on a tree, or log, outside of the bark. Diameter Outside
Bark is often estimated.
Face -- A section of the tree surface (usually within the butt sixteen feet)
that is ¼ of the circumference of the tree and extending the full length of
the log.
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) -- A unique code
identifying U.S. States and counties (or units in Alaska).
254
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Forest Industry Land -- Land owned by companies or individuals that
operate wood-using plants.
Forestland -- Land that is at least 10 percent stocked by forest trees of
any size, or land formerly having such tree cover, and is not currently
developed for a nonforest use. The minimum area for classification as
forestland is one acre. Roadside, streamside, and shelterbelt strips of
timber must have a crown width at least 120 feet wide to qualify as
forestland. Unimproved roads and trails, streams and other bodies of
water, or natural clearings in forested areas shall be classified as forest,
if less than 120 feet in width or an acre in size. Grazed woodlands,
reverting fields, and pastures that are not actively maintained are
included if the above qualifications are satisfied. (Also see definitions of
nonforest land, idle farmland and improved/maintained pasture.)
Forest Trees -- Plants having a well-developed, woody stem and
usually more than 12 feet in height at maturity.
FOREST TYPE -- A classification of forestland based upon the trees or
tree communities that constitute the majority of stocking on the site.
GPS -- Global Positioning System. Information from this system is
collected and used to determine the latitude and longitude of each plot.
Hardwoods -- Dicotyledonous trees, usually broad-leaved and
deciduous.
Idle Farmland -- Former cropland or pasture that has not been tended
within the last 2 years and that has less than 10 percent stocking with
live trees.
Improved Pasture -- Land that is currently maintained and used for
grazing. Evidence of maintenance, besides the degree of grazing,
includes condition of fencing, presence of stock ponds, periodic brush
removal, seeding, irrigation, or mowing.
Inclusion -- An area that would generally be recognized as a separate
condition, except that it is not large enough to qualify. For example, a ½
acre pond within a forested stand.
Industrial Wood -- All roundwood products, except firewood.
Land Area -- As defined by the Bureau of the Census: The area of dry
land and land temporarily or partially covered by water such as marshes,
swamps, and river flood plains (omitting tidal flats below mean tide);
streams, sloughs, estuaries and canals less than 200 feet in width, and
ponds less than 4.5 acres in area.
255
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Limbs -- That part of a tree above the stump that does not meet the
requirements for sawlog and upper-stem portions, including all live,
sound branches to a minimum of 4 inches DOB at the knot collar.
Maintained Road -- Any road, hard topped or other surfaces, that is
plowed or graded periodically and capable of use by a large vehicle.
Rights-of-way that are cut or treated to limit herbaceous growth are
included in this area.
Marsh -- Low, wet areas characterized by heavy growth of weeds and
grasses and an absence of trees.
Measurement Quality Objective (MQO) -- Describes the acceptable
tolerance for each data element. MQOs consist of two parts: a
statement of the tolerance and a percentage of time when the collected
data are required to be within tolerance.
Merchantable Sawtimber Top -- The point on the bole of sawtimber
trees above which a sawlog cannot be produced.
Minimum
merchantable top is 7.0 inches DOB for softwoods and 9.0 inches DOB
for hardwoods.
Microplot -- A circular, fixed-radius plot with a radius of 6.8 feet that is
used to sample trees less than 5.0 inches at DBH, as well as other
vegetation.
National Forest Land -- Federal lands which have been legally
designated as National Forests or purchase units, and other lands under
the administration of the Forest Service, including experimental areas
and Bankhead-Jones Title III lands.
Native American (Indian) Land -- Tribal lands held in fee, or trust, by
the Federal government but administered for Indian tribal groups and
Indian trust allotments. This land is considered “Private Lands”, Owner
Group 40.
Net volume -- Gross volume less deductions for rot, sweep, or other
defect affecting use for timber products.
Non-census Water -- Bodies of water from 1 to 4.5 acres in size and
water courses from 30 feet to 200 feet in width.
Nonforest Land -- Land that does not support, or has never supported,
forests, and lands formerly forested where use for timber management
is precluded by development for other uses. Includes areas used for
crops, improved pasture, residential areas, city parks, improved roads of
any width and adjoining rights-of-way, power line clearings of any width,
and noncensus water. If intermingled in forest areas, unimproved roads
256
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
and nonforest strips must be more than 120 feet wide, and clearings,
etc., more than one acre in size, to qualify as nonforest land.
Nonstockable -- Areas of forestland that are not capable of supporting
trees because of the presence of rock, water, etc.
Other Federal Lands -- Federal land other than National Forests.
These include lands administered by the USDI Bureau of Land
Management, USDI National Park Service, USDI Fish and Wildlife
Service, Department of Defense, Department of Energy, Army Corps of
Engineers, and military bases.
Overgrown Knot -- The scar left in the bark by a limb that has been
completely overgrown, but still outlined by the circular configuration in
the bark.
OWNER CLASS -- A variable that classifies land into fine categories of
ownership.
OWNER GROUP -- A variable that classifies land into broad categories
of ownership; Forest Service, Other Federal Agency, State and Local
Government, and Private. Differing categories of Owner Group on a
plot require different conditions.
Phase 1 (P1) -- FIA activities done as part of remote-sensing and/or
aerial photography.
Phase 2 (P2) -- FIA activities done on the network of ground plots
formerly known as FIA plots.
Phase 3 (P3) -- FIA activities done on a subset of Phase 2 plots
formerly known as Forest Health Monitoring plots. Additional ecological
indicator information is collected from Phase 3 plots.
Plot -- A cluster of four subplots that samples approximately 1/6 acre.
The subplots are established so that subplot 1 is centered within the
sample and the centers of subplots 2, 3,and 4 are located 120 feet from
the center of subplot 1 at azimuths of 360, 120, and 240 degrees,
respectively. Each subplot has an associated microplot and annular plot
PRIVATE OWNER INDUSTRIAL STATUS -- Indicates whether Private
land owners own and operate a wood processing plant.
REGENERATION STATUS -- A stand descriptor that indicates whether
a stand has been naturally or artificially regenerated.
Reserved Land -- Land that is withdrawn from timber utilization by a
public agency or by law.
257
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
RESERVE STATUS -- An indication of whether the land in a condition
has been reserved.
Rotten Cull Tree -- A live tree with less than 1/3 of its gross board-foot
volume in logs that meet size, soundness and grade requirements, and
more than ½ of the board-foot cull is due to rot. Or, a live poletimber
size that prospectively will have less than 1/3 of its gross board-foot
volume in logs that meet size, soundness and grade requirements, and
more than ½ of the board-foot cull is due to rot.
Rough Cull Tree -- A live tree with less than 1/3 of its gross board-foot
volume in logs that meet size, soundness and grade requirements, and
more than ½ of the board-foot cull is due to sound defects such as
sweep, crook, etc. Or, a live poletimber size that prospectively will have
less than 1/3 of its gross board-foot volume in logs that meet size,
soundness and grade requirements, and more than ½ of the board-foot
cull is due to sound defects such as sweep, crook, etc.
Roundwood Products -- Logs, bolts or other round sections cut from
trees for industrial or consumer uses. (Note: includes sawlogs veneer
logs and bolts; cooperage logs and bolts; pulpwood, fuelwood; pilings;
poles; posts; hewn ties; mine timbers; and various other round, split, or
hewn products.)
Saplings -- Live trees 1.0 to 4.9 inches DBH.
Seedlings -- Live trees less than 1.0 DBH that are at least one foot tall.
Site Class -- A classification of forestland that indicates the potential
capacity to grow crops of industrial wood based on fully stocked natural
stands.
Softwoods -- Coniferous trees, usually evergreen having needles or
scale-like leaves.
STAND AGE -- A stand descriptor that indicates the average age of the
live trees not overtopped in the predominant stand size-class of a
condition.
STAND DENSITY -- A stand descriptor that indicates the relative tree
density of a condition class. The classification is based on the number of
stems/unit area, basal area, tree cover, or stocking of all live trees in the
condition which are not overtopped, compared to any previously defined
condition class tree density.
258
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
STAND SIZE -- A stand descriptor that indicates which size-class of
trees that are not overtopped constitutes the majority of stocking in the
stand.
State, County and Municipal Lands -- Lands owned by states,
counties, and local public agencies or municipalities, or lands leased to
these government units for 50 years or more.
Stocking -- The relative degree of occupancy land by trees, measured
as basal area or the number of trees in a stand by size or age and
spacing, compared to the basal area or number of trees required to fully
utilize the growth potential of the land; that is, the stocking standard.
Sound Knot or Limb -- Knots or limbs that are intergrown, or encased,
with the surrounding wood, and that show no sign s of decay. Bark may
not be present on the limbs.
Subplot -- A circular, fixed-area plot with a radius of 24.0 feet. Each
subplot represents ¼ of the fixed plot sample unit.
TOTAL LENGTH -- The total length of the tree, recorded to the nearest
1.0 ft from ground level to the tip of the apical meristem. For trees
growing on a slope, measure on the uphill side of the tree. If the tree
has a broken or missing top, the total length is estimated to what the
length would be if there were no missing or broken top. Forked trees
should be treated the same as unforked trees
Transition Zone -- An area where a distinct boundary between two or
more different conditions cannot be determined.
Upper Stem Portion -- The part of the bole of sawtimber trees above
the sawlog top to a minimum top diameter of 4.0 inches DOB or to the
point where the central stem breaks into limbs.
259
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
260
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 8
Quality Standards
261
Northeastern Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
262
Northeastern Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Field Plot Data Quality Standards
Forest Inventory and Analysis Unit
Northeastern Research Station
Our resource inventories are designed to satisfy specified precision
objectives. Much of our resource information comes from a very small
sample of actual ground conditions. Our sampling system is statistically
sound. The sample plots selected will satisfy the stated precision
objectives, if the ground data is free of errors. While there is no way in
which the latter can be completely assured, it is obvious that field errors
must be kept to a minimum. This objective can be accomplished by
establishing and adhering to a quality control program. By setting
standards and monitoring field work, we can prevent or at least detect
and correct errors, and eliminate the repetition of most errors.
After the initial training period, periodic inspections will be made of every
crew's field work. Frequency of inspections will partially be determined
by the number of errors detected. All instances of error will be analyzed
and discussed with the crew concerned.
Many of the entries for items on the tally form are, or can be, obtained
by measurements. When those measurements can be repeated with
uniform results by several individuals, it is proper to set close tolerance
limits that define acceptable data.
There are also many item entries which require some degree of
subjective evaluation. The attributes with the greater subjectivity should
have broader tolerance limits. While it would be desirable for every
crew to have the exact same entries for all such items, it is not a realistic
goal. However, it is possible, and should be the goal of all crews, to
assign any given attribute a similar value on a scale of values. For
example, if the scale of possible values is 1 through 5, it is reasonable
to expect that all crews would be within +/- one level on the scale.
There are also items designed to be answered yes/no, present/absent,
or other entries which require other mutually exclusive answers. Often
the answer depends on the amount of time spent examining the area.
Crews are not expected to find needles in haystacks: they are expected
to complete every required item, as best they can, based on their
training, instructions received, and evidence on the plot.
The time required to complete a plot will vary with access, terrain,
amount of tally, and numerous other factors. In the past, the average
on-plot time has been three to four hours. Supervisors will monitor
progress and goals, and minimum acceptable performance levels will be
adjusted as conditions warrant. The first priority of all crews will be
263
Northeastern Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
quality work, performed safely. The following allowed limits will be
applied to our field work until revised in writing.
For All Plots
Completeness -- It is the responsibility of each crew to complete all
items before leaving the sample plot. Appendix 11 of the field guide
contains guides and examples for many plot situations. The guides
indicate which items must be completed. There will be no excuse for
incomplete data unless there are very unusual circumstances, and those
circumstances have been explained in the general notes section of the
tally form.
When plot data is collected and stored with the aid of an electronic data
recorder; the data recorder program will ensure that many required
items for a plot are completed, but there are many important questions
that are still answered on the tally sheets. It is incumbent upon the crew
to make sure that all required items are completed before leaving the
sample plot.
Legibility Tally forms are the basis for the inventory. Tally forms that
are not legible will be considered as evidence of unsatisfactory work. If
the recorded data is not legible enough to be processed correctly it is
useless, no matter how accurate it may have been.
Photo and Course to Plot Information
Item 2.100 Plot Photo -- These items should have been filled in
during plot setup. If blank items are present, or if previously made entry
appears to be incorrect, report this to your supervisor.
Item 2.110 Starting Point -- An entire plot may be rated
unsatisfactory if the starting point (SP) is pinpricked incorrectly, or if the
SP is difficult to locate. Selection guidelines should be followed closely
for all starting points and witness trees. Pinpricks made by anything
other than a fine pin or needle will not be tolerated. Pinpricks are to be
labeled on the back of the photo, and the locations of the SP and
witness trees well defined.
Item 2.120 Course to Plot -- Plots must be established at the correct
locations, and in a manner which facilitates the sure and efficient return
by future crews.
264
Northeastern Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Distance to the plot, measured from the aerial photograph, should be
within one half of one 1/50 of an inch, from the same measurement of
an inspector.
Although a compass line may not read the same as the inspector's, it
must be accurate once it is established. Carefully check all calculations
in the area provided on page 4 of the tally form. Draw and label the
reference line and the traverse line on the face of the aerial photograph.
The tolerance for 100 foot chaining intervals varies from ± .5 feet to ±
2.0 feet, depending on the slope of the traverse and the density of
ground cover. It is important that tapes be kept straight in both the
horizontal and vertical planes when "chaining". Accuracy over the entire
traverse should be within 2 feet per every 1000 feet of the calculated
distance.
Slope corrections must be within ± 5 percent.
The species of the line trees must be identified correctly. If something
other than a tree is referenced, it must be noted. Other line tree
requirements are:
•
•
•
•
...DBH must be within 2 inches
...distances must be within 2 feet
...direction must be within a one hour interval
...scribes must point in the correct direction
Make a note when the line crosses a stream, fence or boundary line.
Item 2.150 Plot Center -- Must be located correctly and the plot
center witness trees must be accurately recorded, or the entire plot will
be considered unsatisfactory.
For new plots, when using 1:40,000 scale photos, it will generally be
satisfactory if the crew is within 66.7 feet (the equivalent of 1/50 of an
inch on an aerial photo) of where PC should be and in the same forest
condition that was photo interpreted. The only exception is when
changes occurred on the ground since the photo was taken.
For remeasured plots, the plot must be relocated at the same location
that it was previously established unless the general area has been
severely disturbed. If a severe, large-scale disturbance has taken place
since the last inventory, and the land use is still, or once again, forested,
the plot should be re-established within the guidelines for new plots.
265
Northeastern Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
In the rare case when it appears that the previous crew established
a plot in the wrong location it is important that it be re-established
at that same location. The data from such a plot can still be very
useful. Complete the plot and bring the situation to the attention of the
Field Supervisor.
Item 2.170 Plot Diagrams -- Streams, fences, fields, or other land
features are to be noted, when they exist. Condition boundaries must
be included.
Item 2.181 Sketch Map of Plot Location -- Sketch maps should
provide enough information so that a plot can be relocated without the
use of the aerial photos. Details (bridges, rivers, trails, etc.), and
mileage to an easily located intersection or reference point must be
included.
Inspectors check the quality of sketch maps by attempting to locate a
plot with the sketch map. A plot that cannot be located due to a poor
sketch will be considered unsatisfactory.
Neatness and clarity are desired. Artwork is not necessary and is not
desired. A good sketch map should take no more than five to ten
minutes to complete.
For the following sections refer to the main portion of the text for quality
standards.
Plot Level Data
Subplot, Condition Class & Boundary Information
Seedling Data
Tree Data
Site Index Data
Ownership Data
266
Northeastern Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
A BASIC EDIT FOR COMPLETENESS AND OBVIOUS ERRORS
MUST BE MADE BEFORE LEAVING THE PLOT.
Crews will be informed of any errors detected in their work. They
will be expected not to repeat those errors. The goal of this quality
control program is to insure that all field data is of the highest
possible quality. If any item of the field tally procedure is unclear,
ask your supervisor for clarification.
267
Northeastern Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
268
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 9
Tree Grades
269
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
270
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
HARDWOOD TREE GRADES
GRADE 1 GRADE 2
GRADING FACTORS
Butt 16
Butt 16
Length of grading zone (ft)
a
Best 12
Best 12
Length of grading section (ft)
b
13
Minimum DBH (in)
16
Minimum DIB at the top of the
b
c
13 16 20
11 12
grading section (in)
d
Clear cuttings on 3rd best face
minimum length (ft)
7 5 3
3 3
number on face (max)
2
2 3
yield in face length (min)*
5/6
4/6
Cull deduction, including crook
and sweep but excluding shake,
e
9
9
maximum w/in grading section
(%)
GRADE 3
Butt 16
Best 12
11
8
2
unlimited
3/6
50
a
Whenever a 14- or 16-ft section of the butt log is better than the best 12-ft
section, the grade of the longer section will become the grade of the tree.
This longer section, when used, is the basis for determing the grading factors, such as diameter and cull deduction.
b
In basswood and ash, DIB at the top of the grading section may be 12-in
and DBH may be 15-in.
c
Grade 2 trees can be 10-in DIB at the top of the grading section if
otherwise meeting suface requirements for small grade 1's.
d
A clear cutting is a portion of a face free of defects, extending the width of
the face. A face is one-fourth of the surface of the grading section
as divided lengthwise.
e
15% crook and sweep, or 40% total cull deduction are permitted in grade 2
if size and surface of grading section qualify as grade 1. If rot shortens
the required clear cuttings to the extent of dropping the butt log to grade 2,
do not drop the tree's grade to 3 unless the cull deduction for rot is
greater than 40%.
*Minimum Yield in Face Length
Grade 1 Min. Grade 2 Min. Grade 3 Min.
Face Length
Yield
Yield
Yield
12-ft
10-ft
8-ft
6-ft
14-ft
11.7-ft
9.3-ft
7-ft
16-ft
13.3-ft
10.7-ft
8-ft
271
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
TIE AND TIMBER GRADE 4
GRADING FACTORS
SPECIFICATIONS
Position in tree
Butts and uppers
Scaling diameter (in)
8-in DIB and larger
Length, w/o trim (ft)
12-ft and longer
No requirements (not graded on cutting
Clear cuttings
basis)
Maximum sweep
One-fourth DIB of small end for half logs,
allowance
and one-half DIB for logs 16-ft long
Sound surface defects -
Single knots
Whorled knots
Knots
Unsound surface
b
defects
Any number, if none has an average collar
diameter that is more than one-third of the
log diameter at the point of occurrence.
a
Any number, provided the sum of the collar
diameters does not exceed one-third the log
diameter at the point of occurrence.
Any number not exceeding knot specifications, if they do not extend more than 3-in
into the contained tie or timber.
Any number and size, if they do not extend
into contained tie or timber. If they extend
into contained tie or timber, they shall not
exceed size, number, and depth of limits for
sound defects.
a
Knot collar is the average of the vertical and horizontal diameters of the
limb, or knot swelling, as measured flush with the surface of the log.
b
Interior defects are not visible in standing trees. They are considered in
grading cut logs. No interior defects are permitted except one shake not
more than one-third the width of the contained tie or timber, and one
split not more than 5-in long.
272
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
GRADING FACTORS
Minimum DBH (in)
EASTERN WHITE PINE TREE GRADES
GRADE 2
GRADE 3
GRADE 1
9
9
9
Maximum weevil injury in
butt 16-ft section
None
(number)
Minimum face
Two full length
requirements on butt 16- or four 50%
ft section
length good
faces1. (In
addition, knots
on balance of
faces shall not
exceed size
limitations for
Grade 2
sections.)
Maximum sweep or
crook in butt 16-ft
section (%)
Maximum total scaling
deduction in 16-ft
section (%)
GRADE 4
9
None
2 Injuries
No limit
NO GOOD
FACES
REQUIRED.
Maximum diameter of knots on
3 best faces:
SOUND RED
KNOTS not to
exceed 1/6 of
scaling diameter
or 3-in
maximum2.
DEAD OR
BLACK
KNOTS, including overgrown knots, not
to exceed 1/12
scaling diameter
and 1-1/2-in
maximum
NO GOOD
FACES
REQUIRED.
Maximum diameter of knots on
3 best faces:
SOUND RED
KNOTS not to
exceed 1/3 of
scaling diameter
of 5-in
maximum2.
DEAD OR
BLACK
KNOTS, including overgrown knots, not
to exceed 1/6
scaling diameter and 2-1/2in maximum
Includes all
trees not
qualifying for
Grade 3 or
better and
judged to have
at least 1/3 of
their gross
volume in sound
wood suitable
for manufacture
into standard
lumber.
20
30
40
No limit
50
50
50
No limit
After the tentative grade of the section is established from face examination, the section
will be reduced one grade whenever the following defects are evident3:
CONKS, PUNK KNOTS AND PINE BORER DAMAGE ON THE SURFACE OF THE SECTION
Degrade one grade if present on one face.
Degrade two grades if present on two faces.
Degrade three grades if present on three to four faces.
If the final grade of the grading section is 1, 2 or 3, examine the tree for weevil injuries in
the merchantable stem above 16-ft. If the total apparent weevil damage exceeds 3, degrade the tree grade one below the section grade3. Otherwise the tree grade is the same
as the final section grade.
1
2
3
Trees under 16-in DBH require four full length good faces.
Scaling diameter is estimated at the top of the 16-ft grading section.
No tree will be designated below Grade 4 unless net tree scale is less than one-third of
gross tree scale.
273
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
White Pine Collar Diameter Limits for Red & Black Knots
Scaling Diameter
(DIB in)
Black Knots
1/12
Black & Red Knots Red Knots
1/6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
7/12"
2/3"
3/4"
5/6"
11/12"
1"
1-1/12"
1-1/6"
1-1/4"
1-1/3"
1-5/12"
1-1/2" Max
1-1/6"
1-1/3"
1-1/2"
1-2/3"
1-5/6"
2"
2-1/6"
2-1/3"
2-1/2" Black Max
2-2/3"
2-5/6"
3" Red Max
1/3
2-1/3"
2-2/3"
3"
3-1/3"
3-2/3"
4"
4-1/3"
4-2/3"
5" Max
5" Max
5" Max
5" Max
SPRUCE, FIR, CEDAR, TAMARACK AND HEMLOCK
Minimum Merchantability Specifications for Grade 1
DIB (small
end of log)
6" - 12"
13" +
Length (2-ft
multiples
Total
w/o trim) Deduction
12' - 16'
12' - 16'
50%
50%
Sweep
Permitted
Other Requirements*
25%
Sound knots not over 2" in
diameter permitted. Shake
permitted up to 20% of gross
scale if not combined with
other serious defect.
25%
Sound knots not over 3" in
diameter permitted. Shake
permitted up to 20% of gross
scale if not combined with
other serious defect.
* One branch or sound knot that exceeds the diameter limitations is
permitted to meet Grade 1 specifications.
Note: Shake is not visible on standing trees and cannot be used as a
grading criteria.
274
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
SOUTHERN PINE TREE GRADES
(All pines except White Pine.)
FACE LENGTH
GRADE 1
GRADE 2
GRADE 3
16-ft grading
3 or 4 clear
1 or 2 clear
No clear faces
section
faces
faces
After the tentative grade is established, the tree will be reduced one
grade for each of the following:
Sweep - Degrade any tentative Grade 1 or 2 tree one grade
if sweep in the lower 12-ft of the grading section
amounts to 3 or more inches and equals or exceeds
one-fourth the DBH.
Heart rot - Degrade any tentative Grade 1 or 2 tree one grade
if conks, punk knots, or other evidence of advanced
heart rot is found anywhere on the tree stem.
Note - No tree can be degraded below Grade 3, provided
the total scaling deductions for sweep and/or rot do
not exceed two-thirds the gross scale of the tree.
Trees with total scaling deductions in excess of twothirds are classified as cull (Grade 5).
A face is one-fourth the circumference of the 16-ft grading section and extends the full length of the grading section. Clear faces are those free from
knots measuring more than 1/2-in in diameter, overgrown knots of any size,
and holes more than 1/4-in in diameter. Faces may be rotated, if necessary,
to obtain the maximum number of clear faces on the grading section.
275
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
276
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 10
Slope Correction, Cull Tables and Scaling Deduction
277
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
278
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
SLOPE CORRECTION TABLE
Chaining Distances
%
SLOPE
1-3
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
84
86
88
90
92
94
96
98
100
120.0
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.9
1.2
1.5
1.9
2.4
2.9
3.4
4.0
4.6
5.3
6.0
6.7
7.5
8.4
9.2
10.2
11.1
12.1
13.1
14.2
15.3
16.4
17.5
18.7
19.9
21.2
22.5
23.8
25.1
26.5
27.9
29.3
30.7
32.2
33.7
35.2
36.7
38.3
39.8
41.4
43.1
44.7
46.3
48.0
49.7
100.0
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.3
1.6
2.0
2.4
2.8
3.3
3.8
4.4
5.0
5.6
6.3
7.0
7.7
8.5
9.3
10.1
10.9
11.8
12.7
13.7
14.6
15.6
16.6
17.7
18.7
19.8
20.9
22.1
23.2
24.4
25.6
26.8
28.1
29.3
30.6
31.9
33.2
34.5
35.9
37.2
38.6
40.0
41.4
98.4
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.5
0.7
1.0
1.2
1.6
1.9
2.4
2.8
3.3
3.8
4.3
4.9
5.5
6.2
6.9
7.6
8.3
9.1
9.9
10.7
11.6
12.5
13.4
14.4
15.4
16.4
17.4
18.4
19.5
20.6
21.7
22.8
24.0
25.2
26.4
27.6
28.9
30.1
31.4
32.7
34.0
35.3
36.6
38.0
39.4
40.8
60.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.3
2.6
3.0
3.4
3.8
4.2
4.6
5.1
5.6
6.0
6.6
7.1
7.6
8.2
8.8
9.4
10.0
10.6
11.2
11.9
12.6
13.2
13.9
14.6
15.4
16.1
16.8
17.6
18.4
19.1
19.9
20.7
21.5
22.3
23.2
24.0
24.9
279
52.7
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.3
1.5
1.7
2.0
2.3
2.6
3.0
3.3
3.7
4.1
4.5
4.9
5.3
5.8
6.2
6.7
7.2
7.7
8.2
8.8
9.3
9.9
10.4
11.0
11.6
12.2
12.9
13.5
14.1
14.8
15.5
16.1
16.8
17.5
18.2
18.9
19.6
20.4
21.1
21.8
49.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.9
2.2
2.5
2.8
3.1
3.4
3.8
4.1
4.5
4.9
5.4
5.8
6.2
6.7
7.2
7.6
8.1
8.7
9.2
9.7
10.3
10.8
11.4
12.0
12.5
13.1
13.7
14.4
15.0
15.6
16.3
16.9
17.6
18.2
18.9
19.6
20.3
37.2
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.9
2.1
2.3
2.6
2.9
3.1
3.4
3.7
4.1
4.4
4.7
5.1
5.4
5.8
6.2
6.6
7.0
7.4
7.8
8.2
8.6
9.1
9.5
10.0
10.4
10.9
11.4
11.7
12.4
12.8
13.3
13.9
14.4
14.9
15.4
34.6
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.0
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.9
2.2
2.4
2.7
2.9
3.2
3.5
3.8
4.1
4.4
4.7
5.1
5.4
5.8
6.1
6.5
6.9
7.2
7.6
8.0
8.4
8.9
9.3
9.7
10.1
10.6
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.4
12.9
13.4
13.8
14.3
24.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.1
0.1
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.5
1.7
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.1
3.3
3.5
3.7
4.0
4.2
4.5
4.8
5.0
5.3
5.6
5.9
6.1
6.4
6.7
7.0
7.3
7.7
8.0
8.3
8.6
8.9
9.3
9.6
9.9
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
PERCENT OF CUBIC-FOOT CULL VOLUME FOR ALL TREES
BY 4-FT SECTIONS & LOCATION IN THE TREE
MERCHANT
ABLE
HEIGHT (FT)
1ST
SECTION
2ND
SECTION
3RD
SECTION
4TH
SECTION
5TH
SECTION
6TH
SECTION
7TH
SECTION
8TH
SECTION
9TH
SECTION
8
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
64
68
72
57
42
30
26
24
21
20
19
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
10
43
32
26
23
21
19
18
16
15
14
13
12
11
11
10
10
9
26
23
21
18
17
16
14
13
12
12
11
10
10
9
9
8
21
19
17
16
14
13
12
11
10
9
9
9
9
8
8
11
10
10
10
9
9
9
8
8
8
7
7
6
6
10
9
8
8
8
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
8
7
8
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
1OTH
SECTION
11TH
SECTION
12TH
SECTION
13TH
SECTION
14TH
SECTION
15TH
SECTION
16TH
SECTION
17TH
SECTION
18TH
SECTION
6
6
6
6
6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
40
44
48
52
56
60
64
68
72
280
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
PERCENT OF BOARD-FOOT CULL OF HARDWOOD SAWTIMBER
BY 4-FT SECTIONS & LOCATION IN THE TREE
LOG (FT)
1ST
SECTION
2ND
SECTION
3RD
SECTION
4TH
SECTION
5TH
SECTION
6TH
SECTION
7TH
SECTION
8TH
SECTION
(16)
29
26
24
21
1-1/2 (24)
19
18
16
16
16
15
2
(32)
15
14
13
13
12
12
11
10
2-1/2 (40)
12
12
11
11
10
10
9
9
3
(48)
12
10
10
9
9
9
8
7
3-1/2 (56)
10
10
9
9
9
8
8
7
4
9
9
9
8
8
7
7
7
9TH
SECTION
10TH
SECTION
11TH
SECTION
12TH
SECTION
13TH
SECTION
14TH
SECTION
15TH
SECTION
16TH
SECTION
2-1/2 (40)
8
8
3
(48)
7
7
6
5
3-1/2 (56)
7
6
5
5
4
3
4
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
1
(64)
(64)
PERCENT OF BOARD-FOOT CULL OF SOFTWOOD SAWTIMBER
BY 4-FT SECTIONS & LOCATION IN THE TREE
LOG (FT)
1ST
SECTION
2ND
SECTION
3RD
SECTION
4TH
SECTION
5TH
SECTION
6TH
SECTION
7TH
SECTION
8TH
SECTION
(16)
33
27
21
19
1-1/2 (24)
26
20
16
15
12
11
2
(32)
21
17
14
12
10
9
9
8
2-1/2 (40)
19
15
12
10
9
8
7
7
3
(48)
16
13
11
10
8
7
7
6
3-1/2 (56)
13
12
10
9
7
7
6
6
4
10
9
9
8
7
7
6
6
9TH
SECTION
10TH
SECTION
11TH
SECTION
12TH
SECTION
13TH
SECTION
14TH
SECTION
15TH
SECTION
16TH
SECTION
2-1/2 (40)
7
6
3
(48)
6
6
5
5
3-1/2 (56)
6
5
5
5
5
4
4
6
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
1
(64)
(64)
281
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Methods of Determining Scaling Deduction
(Examples based on an 8 foot log with a 20 inch scaling diameter)
If a section of bole is affected,
2’
deduct percent of log length
affected
Cull
Example: 2/8 = 25 percent cull
8’
If a sector is affected, multiply
percent of circle times percent of
length.
Example: (60°÷ 360°) (3÷8) = 6
percent cull
3’
60°
60
°
8’
For a crook, multiply proportion
of diameter displaced times
proportion of log length affected
by crook. *
20”DIB
For Sweep determine sweep
departure and subtract 1” for 8’
logs and 2” for 16’ logs. Divide
by log diameter.
8’
8”
20” DIB
Example: (8-1) ÷ 20 = 35 percent
bd. ft. cull. **
B
A
For Interior Cull, square out
interior cull as a percent of total
volume of the section. For bd. ft.
cull, add 1” to width and
thickness; for cubic ft. cull, use
actual dimensions of rot. For bd.
ft. cull divide width and thickness
by the scaling diameter ( avg.
d.i.b. sm. End) minus one; for
cubic ft. cull, divide by scaling
diameter. Multiply fractions by
percent of log affected.
Example: [(8X10) ÷ (20-1)] X
[2 ÷ 8] = 6 % cubic ft cull.
10”
2’
Example: 10/20 X 2/8 = 12
percent bd. ft cull
8’
20” D.I.B.
2’
9”
7”
8’
* No cubic foot cull reduction is made.
** If a straight line between A and B falls outside the bark, the affected section is over 50% bd. ft
cull.
282
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix 11
Tally Sheet Guide
283
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
284
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
Appendix …TALLY SHEET
On the seven page sample record there are several items that may
require entries, either coded or written, by the field crews.
Where a numbered item requires a coded entry, the number of digits
required for that entry is indicated by the number of X's immediately
below the item number on the sample record. Some items require
measurements to decimal fractions of inches or feet. For those items, it
is understood that the last digit represents a decimal fraction. For
example, a tree DBH of 23.4 inches is coded as 234. The decimal
points are never placed in coded entries.
The entries for some items will have been made in the office. These are
usually items 3.100 through 3.140. These entries may be incorrect, but
do not change any previously made entry without the approval of your
supervisor.
Notes should be recorded as often as needed to clarify coded entries
and to explain unusual or unique situations. Notes are also used to
direct attention to anything about a particular plot that the crews think is
important now, or may be important when the plot is remeasured during
the next inventory. If necessary, attach extra sheets of notes. The
value of notes cannot be overemphasized! Suffice it to say that a
few notes are made at a fraction of the cost that would be involved in
going back to a plot to answer questionable data.
Take a moment to read the statement printed on the inside cover of this
document. Even though it was written more than sixty years ago, this
statement still applies to everything that we do today. Field data
collection is the most important part of this inventory. Everything that
comes afterward is dependent on a complete and accurate set of data.
The information to be recorded on the sample record is determined by
the category of plot (sample kind) and the land use assigned to each
condition by the field crew. Examples of the specific data items needed
for each category of plot appear on the following pages.
Note when using the data recorder the following information is displayed
from plot history files stored in the data recorder memory: plot
identification and previous tree information (tree number, species,
horizontal distance, azimuth, previous tree class / merchatability class,
and previous DBH). In general, the items that specifically apply to the
previous inventory and the current inventory (such as species, horizontal
distance and azimuth) are the items that may be changed.
285
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
USDA FOREST SERVICE
NORTHEASTERN RESEARCH STATION
FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS UNIT
MANUAL VERSION 1.4
PAGE 1
All accessible forestland
TALLY NUMBER
DIST. TO IMP. ROAD
ROAD ACCESS
PUB. USE RESTRIC.
RECREATION USE
WATER ON PLOT
TERRAIN POS
SITE PROD CLASS
MANUAL VERSION
3.230
3.240
3.250
3.255
3.260
3.270
3.280
3.290
3.295
3.400
X
X
X
XXX
X
X
X
CRUISER NUMBER
TRAIL/ROAD TYPE
PLOT LEVEL DATA
3.155
3.160
3.170
3.180
3.190
3.200
3.210
3.220
X
X
XX
XX
XXXX
XX
XX
XXXX
XXX
XXX
DAY
YEAR
PHASE
MONTH
YEAR
3.145
X
MONTH
3.140
XXXX
LAND USE
3.130
XXX
QA STATUS
3.120
X
UNIT
3.110
XX
COUNTY
3.100
STATE
SAMPLE KIND
PREVIOUS
PLOT NUMBER
CURRENT
X
All plots
ME MAINE only
XX
Remeasure plots
"Plot Level Data" -- page 19 - 30 & 35
4.491
XX
4.492
XXXX
4.493
XX
4.494
XXXX
4.495
XX
4.496
4.440
4.450
4.451
4.452
4.460
4.465
4.470
XXXX
XX
XX
XX
XX
X
X
X
STOCKING CLASS
STAND HISTORY
XXXX
STAND STRUCTURE
4.436
XX
TIMBER MGMT. CLASS
4.435
XXXX
TREATMENT 3 YEAR
4.434
XX
PHYSIOGRAPHIC CLASS
4.433
XXXX
TREATMENT 3
4.432
XX
TREATMENT 2 YEAR
4.431
TREATMENT 2
4.420
XXX
TREATMENT 1
4.410
XXX
PAST NONFOREST LU
X
PRESENT NONFOREST LU
4.405
TREATMENT 1 YEAR
XX
DISTURBANCE 3 YEAR
4.400
XX
DISTURBANCE 3
4.380
X
DISTURBANCE 2
4.370
DISTURBANCE 2 YEAR
X
DISTURBANCE 1 YEAR
4.360
X
DISTURBANCE 1
RESERVE STATUS
4.350
X
STAND AGE
REGENERATION STATUS
4.340
XXX
PRIVATE OWNER
INDUSTRIAL STATUS
STAND SIZE
4.330
XX
ARTIFICIAL REGENERATION
SPECIES
FOREST TYPE
4.320
X
1
OWNER CLASS
LAND USE CLASS
4.310
X
OWNER GROUP
CONDITION CLASS STATUS
4.300
TREE DENSITY
CONDITION CLASS NUMBER
CONDITION CLASS LEVEL DATA
ME
2
3
4
5
6
7
"Condition Class Data" -- page 40 - 89
286
REV. 3/2000
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
USDA FOREST SERVICE
NORTHEASTERN RESEARCH STATION
FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS UNIT
MANUAL VERSION 1.4
PAGE 2
X
1
2
3
4
XXX
X
X
XXX
XXX
XX
X
COND CL
ME
COND CL
ME
COND CL
ME
7.105
7.110
7.120
7.130
7.140
X
XXXXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
XXX
AGE
7.100
X
TOTAL LENGTH
7.005
X
DBH
7.001
SPECIES
4.130
CONDITION CLASS LIST
4.125
SUBPLOT NUMBER
4.120
CONDITION CLASS NUM.
4.110
SITE TREE NUMBER
4.107
SNOW / WATER DEPTH
4.106
SITE INDEX DATA
CROWN CLOSURE CLASS
SUBPLOT SLOPE
SUBPLOT ASPECT
4.105
MICROPLOT CENTER
CONDITION
4.100
SUBPLOT CENTER CONDITION
SUBPLOT NUMBER
SLOPE CORRECTION
SUBPLOT LEVEL DATA
COND CL
ME
COND CL
COND CL
"Subplot Data" -- page 37 - 40
All plots
PLOT TYPE
BOUNDARY CHANGE
CONTRASTING COND. CLASS
CONDITION CLASS NUMBER
CORNER AZ TO BOUNDARY
CORNER DIS TO BOUNDARY
4.100
4.200
4.211
4.212
4.213
4.214
4.215
4.216
4.217
X
X
X
X
X
XXX
XXX
XX
XXX
RIGHT AZ TO BOUNDARY
SUBPLOT NUMBER
BOUNDARY DATA
LEFT AZ TO BOUNDARY
"Site Tree Information" -- page 153 - 155
All accessible forestland
All boundaries
M E MAINE only
"Boundary Reference Data" -- page 89 - 94
REV. 3/2000
287
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
USDA FOREST SERVICE
NORTHEASTERN RESEARCH STATION
FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS UNIT
MANUAL VERSION 1.4
SP
Printed label with plot
and photo information
PC
MO
3.160
DAY
3.170
YR
3.180
XX
CRUISER
3.220
XX
MIN
3.320
SEC
3.330
DEG
3.340
MIN
3.350
SEC
3.360
XX
XX
XX.XX
XXX
XX
XX.XX
DEG
3.310
MIN
3.320
SEC
3.330
DEG
3.340
MIN
3.350
SEC
3.360
XX
XX
XX.XX
XXX
XX
XX.XX
0
.
0
.
GPS
ELEVATION
3.365
XXX
XXX
& /
TIME
:
& AM PM
OWNER TELEPHONE #:
/
& /
TIME
:
& AM PM
POSTED?
N
ON-SITE [
&]
LETTER [
&]
TELEPHONE [
3.380
XXXXXX
+
-
/
Y
PLGR S/N
OWNER CONTACT ATTEMPT #2: DATE
OWNER CONTACT?
GPS
ERROR(ft)
3.375
X
XXXX
XXX
.
GPS
LOCATION
3.370
OWNER CONTACT ATTEMPT #1: DATE
8.100
.
NUMBER OF
READINGS
3.361
TALLY
3.230
XXX
LONGITUDE
DEG
3.310
XX
PAGE 3
NAD27
GPS LATITUDE
Y
& ]
8.120
N
INFO. QUALITY
NAME
Complete ownership information for plot center on all
forested plots and as necessary for nonforest plots.
ADDRESS
8.110
CITY & ZIP CODE
SOURCE
X
TWP/MAP#/SECT.#
&
2.110 STARTING POINT: SPECIES -
DBH -
Provide notes about the starting point for all plots.
WITNESSED BY SPEC
DBH
HD
AZ
2.120 COURSE TO PLOT (cont.)
DIST
SC
NOTES -
SPP DBH DIS
DIR
NOTES
-- All plots
-- Plots with forested conditions
2.160 PLOT CENTER WITNESSED BY -
Provide notes about the PC witnesses when established.
LINE NO. SPEC
DBH
HD
AZ
*
*
NOTES -
*
-- Complete if witness
trees were also tally trees.
&
-- Plots with a forested condition
at PC.
2.120 COURSE TO PLOT
DISTANCE
&
DIST
SC
FEET
AZIMUTH
SPP DBH DIS
DEG
DIR
NOTES
Continue station information
as needed until arrival at PC.
Include descriptive notes when
warranted.
REV. 1/2000
288
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
USDA FOREST SERVICE
FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
VERSION 1.4
PAGE 4
OFFICE EDIT
FIELD EDIT
3.100
3.110
3.120
XX
X
XXX
3.130
XXXX
3.140
X
All Plots
2.210
XXX
2.220 2.230 2.240
XX
XX
XX
2.182 GENERAL NOTES
2.310
XXX
2.320 2.330 2.340
XX
XX
XX
CALCULATIONS
This area is used for notes about the plot or individual tally items.
All changes in land use must be documented in this section.
Describe the land use for all nonforest plots in this section
(e.g., Entire plot fall in cropland without trees -- LU is 61.)
Show calculations used to
determine the course-to-plot.
N
2.181 SKETCH MAP OF PLOT LOCATION
W
E
S
ALL PLOTS
Draw a sketch map of the general plot location that provides enough detail so that
the Starting Point can be relocated without the use of aerial photographs. Include
the distance to the nearest town, major road intersectons, the locations of SP and
PC, as well as any additional landmarks that may be useful. Record distances that
are driven in miles and tenths of miles, and distances that are walked in feet or
chains.
289
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
USDA FOREST SERVICE
NORTHEASTERN RESEARCH STATION
FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
MANUAL VERSION 1.4
3.100 3.110
XX
X
3.120
XXX
PAGE 5
3.130 3.140
XXXX
X
All Plots
2.170 PLOT DIAGRAM
2
Sketch in the boundaries of any plot that
has multiple conditions, as well as any
features that may facilitate the relocation
of this plot.
Be particularly careful to sketch condition
boundaries that occur within the subplot
as accurately as possible (include azimuths).
For plots where all 4 subplots fall entirely
within one condition, clearly note on this
page: "All Condition 1".
1
4
3
REV. 3/2000
290
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
USDA FOREST SERVICE
NORTHEASTERN RESEARCH STATION
FOREST INVENTORY AND ANALYSIS
MANUAL VERSION 1.4
3.100 3.110
XX
X
PAGE 6
3.120
3.130
3.140
XXX
XXXX
X
Accessible forest land only
All plots
ME MAINE accessible forest land only
5.110
5.120
5.140
5.200
5.300
X
XXX
XXX
XXX
X
XX
001
SPECIES
# OF STEMS
5.100
XX
CONDITION CLASS
5.300
X
REPRODUCTION NUMBER
5.200
XXX
DBH (SEEDS)
5.140
XXX
SUBPLOT NUMBER
# OF STEMS
5.120
XXX
DBH (SEEDS)
5.110
X
SPECIES
5.100
Seedlings
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
ME
Dwarf shrubs
ME
ME
ME
ME
Vines
Shrubs
STOCKING PLOT TALLY
STEMS (SEEDS & SAPS ONLY)
STOCKING VALUE
CUMULATIVE TOTAL
FROM PT. #
DBH
AZI=
SPECIES
DIST=
SUBPLOT NUMBER
SUBPLOT NUMBER
CONDITION CLASS
REPRODUCTION DATA (cont.)
REPRODUCTION NUMBER
REPRODUCTION DATA
X
XXX
XXX
XX
XXX
XXX
"Determination of Stocking
Values" -- page 235 - 249
"Seedling Data" -- page 95 - 98
291
REV. 3/2000
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
)
X
X
X
X
XX
6.206
XXX
XXX
XX
X
XX
X
X
XX
6.271 6.272 6.273 6.274 6.275 6.276 6.290 6.300
XX
X
XX
X
X
XX
X
X
X
6.305
XXXX
6.310 6.320
X
X
6.330
6.340
6.350
XXX
XX
XXX
NOTES
DECAY CLASS
UTILIZATION CLASS
MORTALITY YEAR
TREE CLASS
MERCH CLASS
DAMAGE TYPE 2
DAMAGE SEVERITY 2
DAMAGE TYPE 1
6.270
X
DAMAGE LOCATION 2
6.207 6.210 6.220 6.230 6.240 6.250 6.260
DAMAGE SEVERITY 1
CAUSE OF DEATH
6.205
XX
CROWN CLASS
ACTUAL LENGTH
6.200
PREV TREE/MERCH CLASS
X
PREV DBH
X
COMPACT. CROWN RATIO
6.155 6.160 6.170 6.175 6.180 6.190
BOLE LENGTH
XXX
TOTAL LENGTH
6.150
XX
TREE GRADE
6.140
XXX
LEAN ANGLE
6.130
XXX
SAWLOG LENGTH
DBH
6.120
XXX
TREE CONDITION
AZIMUTH
TREE HISTORY
6.110
XXX
COND. CLASS NUMBER
SPECIES
HORIZ DISTANCE
6.105
X
DIAMETER CHECK
TREE NUMBER
6.100
SUBPLOT NUMBER
Rem. live trees
TREE LEVEL DATA
CUBIC FOOT CULL
XXXX
ME MAINE only
D Dead trees
Rem. live/dead trees
3.130 3.140
% SOUNDNESS (CUFT)
XXX
BOARD FOOT CULL
3.120
X
% SOUNDNESS (BDFT)
XX
S Sawlogs
New trees
LENGTH METHOD
3.100 3.110
PAGE 7
All plots / trees
DAMAGE LOCATION 1
USDA FOREST SERVICE
NORTHEASTERN RESEARCH STATION
FOREST INVENTOY AND ANALYSIS
MANUAL VERSION 1.4
Live saplings 1.0-in to <5.0-in DBH
ME
Live trees >= 5.0-in DBH
S S
Dead trees >= 5.0-in DBH
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
) )
) )
S S
S S
) )
D)
S S
S S
S S
S S
) )
) )
D)
19
20
S S
21
S S
S S
292
S S
) )
) )
Snags >= 5.0-in DBH
Remeasure trees >= 5.0-in DBH
10
12
15
16
17
18
) ) )) ) )
) ) )) ) )
) )) ) )
D
) )) ) )
) ) )) ) )
D
) ) )) ) )
) )) ) )
D)
D
REV. 3/2000
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
USDA FOREST SERVICE
NORTHEASTERN RESEARCH STATION
FOREST INVENTOY AND ANALYSIS
MANUAL VERSION 1.4
3.130 3.140
X
22
23
X
X
X
X
XX
S S
S S
6.206
XXX
XXX
XX
X
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
S S
32
33
34
S S
S S
40
S S
24
25
30
31
41
42
43
44
XX
X
X
XX
) )
) )
) )
6.271 6.272 6.273 6.274 6.275 6.276 6.290 6.300
XX
D)
D)
X
XX
X
X
XX
) )) ) )
) )) ) )
X
X
X
6.305
XXXX
X
6.330
6.340
6.350
XXX
XX
XXX
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
) )) ) )
X
NOTES
DECAY CLASS
6.310 6.320
D
D
D)
UTILIZATION CLASS
MORTALITY YEAR
TREE CLASS
MERCH CLASS
DAMAGE TYPE 2
DAMAGE SEVERITY 2
DAMAGE TYPE 1
DAMAGE LOCATION 2
DAMAGE SEVERITY 1
6.270
X
DAMAGE LOCATION 1
6.207 6.210 6.220 6.230 6.240 6.250 6.260
CROWN CLASS
CAUSE OF DEATH
6.205
XX
COMPACT. CROWN RATIO
ACTUAL LENGTH
6.200
PREV TREE/MERCH CLASS
X
PREV DBH
6.155 6.160 6.170 6.175 6.180 6.190
BOLE LENGTH
XXX
TOTAL LENGTH
6.150
XX
TREE GRADE
6.140
XXX
LEAN ANGLE
6.130
XXX
SAWLOG LENGTH
6.120
XXX
TREE CONDITION
DBH
6.110
XXX
COND. CLASS NUMBER
AZIMUTH
TREE HISTORY
6.105
X
DIAMETER CHECK
SPECIES
HORIZ DISTANCE
6.100
SUBPLOT NUMBER
TREE NUMBER
TREE LEVEL DATA
CUBIC FOOT CULL
XXXX
% SOUNDNESS (CUFT)
XXX
BOARD FOOT CULL
3.120
X
% SOUNDNESS (BDFT)
XX
LENGTH METHOD
3.100 3.110
PAGE 7
D
D
S S
D
D
D
D
S S
S S
D
D
D
50
53
293
D
54
REV. 3/2000
Northeast Field Guide, Version 1.4
May 2000
294